<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?><?xml-stylesheet href="http://www.blogger.com/styles/atom.css" type="text/css"?><feed xmlns='http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom' xmlns:openSearch='http://a9.com/-/spec/opensearchrss/1.0/' xmlns:blogger='http://schemas.google.com/blogger/2008' xmlns:georss='http://www.georss.org/georss' xmlns:gd="http://schemas.google.com/g/2005" xmlns:thr='http://purl.org/syndication/thread/1.0'><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290</id><updated>2024-09-26T15:28:45.429-07:00</updated><title type='text'>MCITP Training Course</title><subtitle type='html'>For Microsoft Lovers</subtitle><link rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#feed' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/posts/default'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default?redirect=false'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/'/><link rel='hub' href='http://pubsubhubbub.appspot.com/'/><link rel='next' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default?start-index=26&amp;max-results=25&amp;redirect=false'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><generator version='7.00' uri='http://www.blogger.com'>Blogger</generator><openSearch:totalResults>41</openSearch:totalResults><openSearch:startIndex>1</openSearch:startIndex><openSearch:itemsPerPage>25</openSearch:itemsPerPage><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2794893984285726636</id><published>2012-09-04T09:52:00.000-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T09:52:03.807-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Create VMware Templates</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
VMware vCenter Server allows you to create templates from existing 
virtual machines. You can use templates to reduce the amount of time 
spent building and implementing new servers, cutting down the 
provisioning process to just a few hours.&lt;br /&gt;

vCenter Server uses one of two methods to build templates. The first method, &lt;strong&gt;Clone to Template&lt;/strong&gt;, duplicates a virtual machine and changes it to the template format. Unlike &lt;strong&gt;Convert to Template&lt;/strong&gt;, which I’ll cover in just a moment, Clone to Template leaves the original virtual machine intact.&lt;br /&gt;

During the cloning process, you’ll have the option to change the 
format of the virtual disk(s). You can either configure the disk to fill
 all of the space in the datastore (thus enabling the template to 
maintain the same level of performance as the source VM), or use the 
thin provisioned format to compress the disk space so that the template 
uses only as much of the datastore as it needs.&lt;br /&gt;

Of course, when vCenter clones the source virtual machine, it doesn’t
 just duplicate the virtual disks, but also creates a copy of the .vmx 
file. The .vmx file holds the data used to configure the VM. Thus, 
before you run Clone to Template, you should remove any unwanted 
settings from the .vmx file associated with the source VM.&lt;br /&gt;

Convert to Template, the other method used to create templates in 
vCenter, is much faster than Clone to Template, because it doesn’t 
create a duplicate of the source VM; instead, it just changes the VM to 
the template format. Convert to Template is more flexible than Clone to 
Template because you can change the template back to a virtual machine 
at any time. For example, software installed to templates created 
through Clone to Template can’t be updated. With Convert to Template, 
however, you can temporarily change the template to a virtual machine 
and install updates to the software, then change the VM back to template
 when done.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Preparing for Template Creation&lt;/h3&gt;
Before creating a template in vCenter, you’ll need to install Sysprep
 to VMware if you intend to clone or convert Windows-based virtual 
machines. Each release of Windows (including service packs) requires its
 own version of Sysprep; you can find the appropriate files on the 
operating system CD/DVD or on the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.microsoft.com/download/en/search.aspx?q=sysprep&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Microsoft Download Center&quot;&gt;Microsoft Download Center&lt;/a&gt;
 website. Find and double-click deploy.cab, and then extract the 
contents of the compressed file to the following location:&amp;nbsp; 
%allusersprofile%\vmware\vmware virtualcenter\sysprep&lt;br /&gt;

If you’re running Windows Server 2003 or below, extract the contents 
to: %allusersprofile%\application data\vmware\vmware 
virtualcenter\sysprep&lt;br /&gt;

There are also a few things to keep in mind before you create your 
source virtual machine (the virtual machine on which the template will 
be based). Components like Active Directory and Microsoft SQL Server 
should be excluded from the template, as these can interfere with the 
template creation process or cause problems after the fact. Also, if 
you’re running VMware Infrastructure 3.5 or later, you can perform a hot
 clone of a virtual machine using the Clone to Template method. Hot 
cloning enables you to keep the source VM active during the cloning and 
conversion process.&lt;br /&gt;

Once you’ve installed Sysprep and created the source virtual machine, you can begin building templates.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Creating a Template with Clone to Template&lt;/h3&gt;
1. Right-click the source virtual machine. Point to “Template,” then select “Clone to Template” from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_011.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Creating a Template with Clone to Template 1&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30280&quot; height=&quot;405&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_011.jpg&quot; width=&quot;474&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

2. Create a name for the template and then choose an Inventory location from the folder list. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_02.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Creating a Template with Clone to Template 2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30281&quot; height=&quot;371&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_02.jpg&quot; width=&quot;480&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

3. Select the ESX host or cluster where the template should be stored. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

4. Select a datastore with enough available space to accommodate the template. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

5. Click “Same as Source” to use the same disk format as the source 
VM; click “Thin Provisioned” to save space on the datastore; click 
“Thick” to reserve all of the datastore space for the virtual hard disk.
 If you select “Thin Provisioned,” make sure to allocate the virtual 
disk to a VMFS3+ datastore. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_04.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Creating a Template with Clone to Template 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30282&quot; height=&quot;199&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_04.jpg&quot; width=&quot;480&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

6. Review your selections on the Ready to Complete screen. Click “Finish” to create the new template in VMware vCenter Server.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Create a Template with Convert to Template&lt;/h3&gt;
1. Power off the source VM. Right-click the virtual machine, and then point to “Template.”&lt;br /&gt;

2. Click “Convert to Template.” Select “Home.” Go to VMs and Templates view to locate the new template.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_06.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Create a Template with Convert to Template&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30283&quot; height=&quot;156&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_06.jpg&quot; width=&quot;480&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

3. Right-click the template and then click “Convert to Virtual 
Machine” to return the template to its original state whenever 
necessary.&lt;br /&gt;

You can also create new templates from existing templates. 
Right-click the source template and then click “Clone” to begin the 
duplication process. The steps in the wizard are identical to those in 
Clone to Template.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Create a Virtual Machine from a Template&lt;/h3&gt;
After you finish creating a template, you can run the Deploy Template Wizard to create a new virtual machine.&lt;br /&gt;

1. Switch to VM and Templates view. Right-click the template and 
select “Deploy Virtual Machine from This Template” from the context 
menu.&lt;br /&gt;

2. Name the virtual machine and select a folder location. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

3. Select the ESX host and/or cluster on which the VM will run. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

4. Choose which resource pool the new virtual machine will use. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

5. Select which datastore or datastores will accommodate the virtual machine. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

6. Choose the appropriate disk format and then click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

7. Click “Do Not Customize,” “Customize Using the Customization 
Wizard,” or “Customize Using an Existing Customization Specification,” 
depending on your preferences. You won’t see this screen if you didn’t 
load Sysprep into vCenter. If you selected the second or third option, 
follow the on-screen instructions to configure the template.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;em&gt;(Note: If the OS installed to the source virtual machine requires
 an OEM product code, select option two and then enter the information 
into the appropriate field when prompted.)&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_05.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Create a Virtual Machine from a Template&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30284&quot; height=&quot;231&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/01/template_05.jpg&quot; width=&quot;480&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

8. Click “Edit Virtual Hardware” to make changes to the VM 
configuration, if necessary. Click “Finish” to deploy the new virtual 
machine.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2794893984285726636/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-create-vmware-templates.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2794893984285726636'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2794893984285726636'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-create-vmware-templates.html' title='How to Create VMware Templates'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2323221908345008741</id><published>2012-09-04T09:50:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T09:50:53.742-07:00</updated><title type='text'>VMware Networking: Configuring and Troubleshooting a vNetwork Part 2</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
For the second half of the series, I’ll explain how to set up a 
distributed vNetwork (DVN) with VMware, and how to troubleshoot your 
vNetwork if problems occur. In part one, I discussed the &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/vmware-networking-configuring-vnetwork-1&quot; title=&quot;Part 1: Configuring &amp;amp; Troubleshooting vNetworks&quot;&gt;basics of virtual networks&lt;/a&gt;, as well as how to create and configure a standard vNetwork.&lt;br /&gt;

Distributed virtual networks use a &lt;strong&gt;distributed virtual switch (DvSwitch)&lt;/strong&gt;
 to manage data transmission between virtual machines and enable guest 
systems to connect to physical networks. As I explained in the last 
post, a DvSwitch works like a global switch; all of the hosts in a 
datacenter can connect to a single distributed switch. A DvSwitch also 
enables the use of &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/private-vlan-concepts&quot; title=&quot;Private VLAN Concepts&quot;&gt;private virtual local area networks (PVLANs)&lt;/a&gt;,
 which divide VLAN domains into smaller sub-domains, enabling multiple 
hosts to use the same address space, but exist separately, or isolated, 
from one another.&lt;br /&gt;

Like standard virtual switches, distributed virtual switches provide 
virtual uplinks called distributed virtual uplinks (dvUplinks). Uplinks 
represent physical network adapters. When creating a DvSwitch, the 
virtualization platform finds the maximum number of uplinks associated 
with a host and uses that number as a basis when setting up the 
dvUplinks on the switch.&lt;br /&gt;

DvSwitches offer more&amp;nbsp;ports than do standard virtual switches; the 
former offers up to 6,000, compared to the latter, which provides up to 
4,088. A maximum of 64 hosts can connect to a single DvSwitch and up to 
16 distributed switches can be implemented per host.&lt;br /&gt;

DvSwitches are stored to the VMkernel, but the settings linked to the
 DvSwitch are contained in the vCenter database. Therefore, to create a 
distributed switch in VMware, you must have vCenter installed.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Creating a Distributed Virtual Switch&lt;/h3&gt;
1. In vCenter, select “Home” and then “Networking.” Click the datacenter on which the host or hosts reside.&lt;br /&gt;

2. Select from the toolbar the icon to launch the Create vNetwork Distributed Switch wizard. Name the vNetwork. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_02.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30927&quot; height=&quot;137&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_02.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

3. Select each host to associate with the DvSwitch, and then select 
which network adapters to use with each ESX/ESXi host. Choose multiple 
network adapters to create uplink groups and provide load balancing and 
fault tolerance to a host. Make sure to select the correct network 
adapters during the creation process, as reassigning the adapters is not
 a simple process. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_03.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30928&quot; height=&quot;129&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_03.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

4. Click “Finish” to create the DvSwitch in vCenter.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Configuring DvSwitches and Port Groups&lt;/h3&gt;
DvSwitches and vSwitches share most of the same options, but 
distributed switches offer a little bit more control over the operation 
of the vNetwork. To access the settings, right-click the virtual switch 
and then select “Edit Settings” from the context menu.&lt;br /&gt;

On the General tab are options to change the name of the switch and 
the number of dvUplinks connected to the vNetwork. On the Advanced tab 
are options to increase or decrease the maximum transmission unit (MTU),
 which limits packet size, and enable Cisco Discovery Protocol. In later
 versions of vSphere, you can also set up features like NetFlow, which 
analyzes network communications transmitted between virtual machines and
 physical networks; or port mirroring, which copies packets from one 
port to another for monitoring purposes.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_04.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30929&quot; height=&quot;190&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_04.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

To configure the port group, right-click it and then click “Edit 
Settings.” Most of the options match those described in the previous 
article, with a few exceptions:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;em&gt;General&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Static Binding&lt;/strong&gt;: Adheres a virtual machine to a port on the DvSwitch that remains active even when the machine is powered off&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Dynamic Binding&lt;/strong&gt;: Assigns a port to a virtual machine at the time the machine is powered on&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Ephemeral&lt;/strong&gt;: Allocates a port to a virtual machine when powered on. If the machine reboots, it loses its old port and is assigned a new one&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_05.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30930&quot; height=&quot;174&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_05.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;em&gt;Advanced&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Override Port Policies&lt;/strong&gt;: Overrides the settings associated with the dvUplinks&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Live Port Moving&lt;/strong&gt;: Transfer stand-alone port groups 
to distributed port groups, assigning settings associated with 
distributed port group to the stand-alone group&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Configure Reset at Disconnect&lt;/strong&gt;: Port settings are reset when a port is disconnected from a virtual machine&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Port Name Format&lt;/strong&gt;: Changes the naming convention of a port group&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
Troubleshooting a vSwitch or DvSwitch&lt;/h3&gt;
Under ideal circumstances, the vNetwork will work as intended after 
creating and configuring the virtual switches and port groups — but 
certain settings can interfere with how the virtual network functions.&lt;br /&gt;

A virtual machine uses a port group to communicate across a network. 
Port groups are associated with a parent switch, so if a machine’s 
virtual network adapter is not assigned the correct port group, it might
 not link to the correct distributed or standard switch, either. 
Furthermore, port group names are case-sensitive, so a group named 
“Test,” for example, is not the same as a group named “test.”&lt;br /&gt;

To confirm that a virtual machine is connected to the correct port 
group, right-click the virtual machine and then select “Edit Settings” 
from the context menu. Select the appropriate port group from the 
drop-down menu.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_06.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30936&quot; height=&quot;272&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/dvs_06.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

While in Virtual Machine Properties, also confirm that “Connected” 
and “Connect at Power On” are checked under the Device Status heading. 
Click “OK.” Restart the virtual machine or network services if the 
machine has not been assigned a static IP.&lt;br /&gt;

If the settings for the virtual machine are correct, move on to 
checking the vNetwork settings for the host. Click the Configuration tab
 after selecting the appropriate ESX/ESXi host and then select the 
Networking link.&lt;br /&gt;

Choose “Virtual Switch” or “Distributed Virtual Switch” from the 
menu. Click the call-out icon for the correct switch or port group and 
review the settings shown in the dialog box to confirm that the network 
configuration is correct.&lt;br /&gt;

If you detected a problem with the settings, click the Properties 
link to make changes to the vSwitch. If you’re working with a 
distributed switch, follow the instructions in the above sections to 
change the switch’s properties. To learn more about the options 
available on these screens, go to the first part of this series and view
 “&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/vmware-networking-configuring-vnetwork-1&quot; title=&quot;Part 1: Configuring &amp;amp; Troubleshooting vNetworks&quot;&gt;Configuring Port vSwitches and Port Groups&lt;/a&gt;.”&lt;br /&gt;

If you’re working with a vSwitch, make sure that the port group is 
using the original name assigned to it upon creation. If you’ve changed 
the name of the port group, you must edit the properties of every 
virtual machine originally connected to it and select the new name from 
the drop-down menu under Network Connection.&lt;br /&gt;

If your switches and port groups are all in order, the next things to
 check are the network adapters. If working with a standard switch, 
select the Network Adapters tab from the vSwitch properties window. If 
working with a DvSwitch, select “Manage Physical Adapters” from the 
Networking screen.&lt;br /&gt;

Confirm that the adapter is using the correct speed and duplex. If 
the adapter settings don’t match that of a network component or client, 
performance or connectivity issues can occur. Click “Edit” to change the
 adapter settings.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2323221908345008741/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/vmware-networking-configuring-and_4.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2323221908345008741'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2323221908345008741'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/vmware-networking-configuring-and_4.html' title='VMware Networking: Configuring and Troubleshooting a vNetwork Part 2'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2549735687197811825</id><published>2012-09-04T09:49:00.005-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T09:49:55.471-07:00</updated><title type='text'>VMware Networking: Configuring and Troubleshooting a vNetwork Part 1</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
The term vNetwork refers to the technologies that VMware vSphere 
utilizes to integrate networking and input/output functions on an 
ESX/ESXi host. vSphere includes a number of features and enhancements to
 provide administrators thorough control over networking processes and 
make management of these processes simpler.&lt;br /&gt;

Implementing a vNetwork in ESX or ESXi is essential for enabling 
virtual machines to communicate with one another within a networking 
environment — but establishing a vNetwork on a host can be a difficult 
and complicated process if you don’t understand how virtual networking 
works in vSphere.&lt;br /&gt;

A virtual network is made up of virtual machines that run on a 
single, physical machine and transmit data to and from one another. In 
vSphere, a virtual switch is called a vSwitch. Virtual machines connect 
to the virtual ports that make up the vSwitch to create a vNetwork. The 
vSwitch then routes network traffic between the connected virtual 
machines. vSwitches can also use physical network adapters, or uplink 
adapters, to connect to a physical switch and associate the virtual 
network with a physical network.&lt;br /&gt;

In vSphere 4, VMware introduced an enhancement to vNetworks: the &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/videos/how-to-add-host-to-cisco-nexus-1000v&quot; title=&quot;Add a Host to Cisco Nexus 1000v&quot;&gt;distributed virtual switch&lt;/a&gt;,
 or DvSwitch. A DvSwitch acts like a global switch, enabling 
administrators to associate a single switch with all ESX or ESXi hosts 
in a datacenter, rather than configure a vSwitch for each individual 
host.&lt;br /&gt;

vSphere separates vSwitches and DvSwitches into smaller groups called
 port groups. VMware uses port groups to connect virtual machines to a 
switch and define settings like traffic shaping, NIC teaming, load 
balancing, and other parameters.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Creating Standard Switches&lt;/h3&gt;
In vSphere, vSwitches can be mapped to one network adapter or to 
multiple network adapters. vSwitches that have no associated network 
adapters can also be implemented as well.&lt;br /&gt;

A standard switch that has no associated adapters is called an 
internal vSwitch. Virtual machines connected to an internal vSwitch 
cannot communicate with other virtual machines outside of the host. 
These switches can be used to test virtual machines before mapping them 
to a production network. A vSwitch that is associated with two or more 
adapters is called a teamed vSwitch; these switches provide an added 
layer of protection to a network and are used for fault tolerance and 
load balancing.&lt;br /&gt;

A vSwitch starts out with 56 ports, by default, but can be configured
 to use up to 4,088 ports, and up to 20 network adapters can be 
associated with a host.&lt;br /&gt;

To create a standard switch in vSphere, follow the instructions below:&lt;br /&gt;

1. In vSphere, select the ESX or ESXi host. Click “Configuration.” 
Select “Networking” from the Hardware box. Click “Add Networking” to run
 the Add Network Wizard.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork1.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30750&quot; height=&quot;224&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork1.png&quot; width=&quot;750&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

2. Select “Virtual Machine” and then click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork2.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30751&quot; height=&quot;401&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork2.png&quot; width=&quot;560&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

3. Select each network adapter to associate with the vSwitch. To 
create an internal vSwitch, make sure that all network adapters are 
deselected.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork3.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30752&quot; height=&quot;207&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork3.png&quot; width=&quot;560&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

4. Create a unique name for the port group. Names are case-sensitive. &lt;em&gt;(A
 couple things to keep mind when naming port groups: one, if the names 
aren’t consistent from host to host, problems will occur when migrating 
virtual machines or using VMotion; two, while it’s possible to rename a 
port group after-the-fact, virtual machines that were connected to that 
port group will disassociate with the switch. Therefore, to avoid 
potential complications, it’s best to keep track of port group names and
 follow a standardized naming convention&lt;/em&gt;.)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork4.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30753&quot; height=&quot;186&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork4.png&quot; width=&quot;560&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

5. Click “Finish” to create a standard vNetwork.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Configuring vSwitches and Port Groups&lt;/h3&gt;
After creating a vNetwork in vSphere, you can modify the vSwitch to add additional ports and change network parameters.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;
Add Port Groups&lt;/h4&gt;
As I mentioned in “Creating Standard Switches,” vSwitches start out 
with 56 ports, but administrators can increase the port number up to 
4,088. Increasing the number of ports per vSwitch is not recommended 
unless the operating environment requires it, as the ESX/ESXi host must 
be restarted after the change, and upping the port number requires 
additional overhead that will lead to wasted resources.&lt;br /&gt;

To increase the number of ports per switch:&lt;br /&gt;

1. Select the host and then click the Configuration tab. Click “Networking” from the Hardware box.&lt;br /&gt;

2. Select the Properties link. Click “vSwitch.” Click “Edit.”&lt;br /&gt;

3. Choose from the drop-down menu the number of ports to use with the standard switch. Click “OK.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork5.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30754&quot; height=&quot;111&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork5.png&quot; width=&quot;397&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;
Set Network Policies&lt;/h4&gt;
You can change the parameters of a vSwitch to apply global policies 
to the vNetwork. Port groups feature options similar to those available 
to switches and can be used to add greater flexibility to a virtual 
network, as the settings associated with the port group can act as 
exceptions to the global policies. You can access the network settings 
using the same method as described in the section above.&lt;br /&gt;

I’ll provide a brief overview of the options you’ll find on each tab:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;
Security&lt;/h4&gt;
&lt;em&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork6.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30755&quot; height=&quot;154&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork6.png&quot; width=&quot;450&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Promiscuous Mode&lt;/strong&gt;: Enables a network adapter to 
retrieve and read all network traffic. Used for packet sniffing to 
troubleshoot and diagnose network issues.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;MAC Address Changes&lt;/strong&gt;: Allows the virtual MAC address
 associated with a virtual machine to be changed. Used to create cluster
 addresses for services like Network Load Balancing, used by Windows 
Server.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Forged Transmits&lt;/strong&gt;: Enables a virtual machine to 
transmit network traffic even if the MAC address on the guest operating 
system doesn’t match the MAC address stored to the .vmx file (the file 
that holds the virtual machine’s configuration information).&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h4&gt;
Traffic Shaping&lt;/h4&gt;
Traffic shaping is used to control bandwidth on a vNetwork. Traffic 
shaping focuses on outbound traffic sent from a virtual machine to the 
physical network; it doesn’t interfere with inbound traffic. The vast 
majority of administrators will never need to use this feature, 
particularly because traffic shaping in the vSphere environment is not 
dynamic and can hinder network performance.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h4&gt;
NIC Teaming&lt;/h4&gt;
NIC Teaming is used for fault tolerance; you can configure standby adapters to take over when the primary adapter fails.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork7.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-30756&quot; height=&quot;355&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/02/vnetwork7.png&quot; width=&quot;450&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Load Balancing&lt;/strong&gt;: Configures how outgoing traffic is handled across multiple network adapters in a teamed vSwitch.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Network Failover Detection&lt;/strong&gt;: Specifies how the host detects network failure.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Notify Switches&lt;/strong&gt;: Tells the physical switches to route network traffic from virtual machines to different physical network adapters.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Failback&lt;/strong&gt;: Specifies how the failed adapter should operate if it comes online again.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
That’s it for configuring standard switches in vSphere. In part two, 
I’ll explain how to set up a vNetwork that runs on a distributed switch,
 and how to troubleshoot your vNetwork if problems occur.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2549735687197811825/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/vmware-networking-configuring-and.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2549735687197811825'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2549735687197811825'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/vmware-networking-configuring-and.html' title='VMware Networking: Configuring and Troubleshooting a vNetwork Part 1'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-1656889397315680629</id><published>2012-09-04T09:49:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T09:49:06.992-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Top 5 Most Common VMware Compatibility Issues (and How to Work Around Them)</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
If a computer is not equipped with the hardware required to run a 
specific version of VMware ESX or ESXi, a number of errors can occur 
during or after the installation process. If a machine lacks a 
compatible BIOS or CPU — equipment central to the operation of the 
system, in other words — setup will usually fail to initialize or 
complete. Sometimes, however, the hardware configuration is just enough 
to get the hypervisor up and running — and that’s where most of the 
problems occur. Incompatibilities can cause hardware to stop operating 
or fail to respond, produce error messages when booting a host or 
virtual machine, and result in poor performance when running VMware 
vCenter Server or accessing a datastore or &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/virtual-networking-101-understanding-vmware-networking&quot; title=&quot;VMware Virtual Networking 101&quot;&gt;virtual network&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

Before installing or upgrading to a version of ESX or ESXi, it’s 
important to confirm that the hardware of the target system is 
compatible with the hypervisor. Even if a previous version of ESX/ESXi 
works with the machine, that doesn’t mean a more recent version will 
work just as well. Review the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://kb.vmware.com/selfservice/microsites/search.do?language=en_US&amp;amp;cmd=displayKC&amp;amp;externalId=1003661&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - minimum requirements&quot;&gt;minimum requirements&lt;/a&gt; to confirm that your hardware is supported.&lt;br /&gt;

Some hardware issues can be worked around, however, and some errors 
that seem hardware-related are instead caused simply by misconfigured 
settings. Below is a list of common compatibility errors or issues you 
might encounter after installing the hypervisor, configuring resources, 
or creating a virtual machine, as well as solutions for resolving these 
problems.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Datastores&lt;/h3&gt;
ESX/ESXi 4.0 does not support LUNs larger than 2TB in size. If the 
size of a LUN surpasses 2TB, the host will fail to assign block devices,
 or storage resources, to the LUN, and prevent VMware from creating a 
datastore on the device.&lt;br /&gt;

You can use extents to work around this limitation. An extent is a 
partition on a LUN. A datastore can consist of up to 32 extents. Since 
each LUN is limited to 2TB in size, and a datastore can utilize 32 
extents in total, volumes of up to 64TB in size are possible in VMware. 
In other words, if you need a datastore to be larger than 2TBs, spread 
the datastore across multiple LUNs to expand the size of the volume.&lt;br /&gt;

To expand a datastore in VMware:&lt;br /&gt;

1. Select the target host. Click “Configuration” and then select “Storage” from the Hardware pane.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_01.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Select the target host&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32639&quot; height=&quot;187&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_01.jpg&quot; width=&quot;450&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
2. Right-click the target datastore and then click “Properties.” Click “Increase.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_02.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Target Datastore&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32640&quot; height=&quot;238&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_02.jpg&quot; width=&quot;300&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
3. Select the appropriate LUN from the options and then click “Next.”
 To create a new extent, select a LUN marked as un-expandable (listed as
 “No” under the “Expandable” category); to increase the size of an 
extent, select a LUN marked as expandable. Select the appropriate disk 
layout and then click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_03.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Un-expandable LUN&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32642&quot; height=&quot;196&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_03.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
4. Check “Maximize Capacity” to use all available disk space, or enter the desired amount in the applicable field. Click “Next.”&lt;br /&gt;

5. Review your options on the summary screen and then click “Finish.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Central Processing Unit&lt;/h3&gt;
While older versions of the hypervisor, such as ESX/ESXi 3.5, can run
 without issue on 32-bit processors, ESX/ESXi 4.0 and ESXi 5.0 both 
require 64-bit CPUs. ESXi 5.0 has additional hardware requirements above
 what ESX 4.0 and ESXi 4.0 require, as well: the latest version of the 
hypervisor must run off, at minimum, a dual-core CPU that supports SAHF 
and LAHF (instructions that control which flags are loaded into the 
upper half of the AX register, the latter of which is used to gather the
 results from arithmetic and logic calculations). Chip manufacturers 
didn’t begin integrating SAHF and LAHF into the 64-bit instruction set 
until 2005, however, so even if you’re running a 64-bit multi-core CPU, 
it still might not work with ESXi 5.0. If the CPU isn’t compatible with 
the hypervisor, installing/upgrading ESX/ESXi will fail.&lt;br /&gt;

Even if the host is able to run off the processor, however, certain 
virtual machines might not. As to be expected, a 64-bit guest operating 
system utilizes a 64-bit CPU. However, just having a processor with a 
64-bit instruction set isn’t enough to run a 64-bit virtual machine; the
 CPU also must have virtualization technology enabled.&lt;br /&gt;

If VT is disabled, the following error is likely to appear when 
attempting to run a 64-bit guest OS in VMware: “Host CPU is incompatible
 with the virtual machine’s requirements at CPUID level.” Enabling Intel
 VT-x or AMD-V in the BIOS should resolve the above error, allowing the 
virtual machine to boot. Since the BIOS varies based on the make and 
model of the motherboard or computer, consult the documentation for your
 machine to determine how to enable virtualization technology.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Optical Drive&lt;/h3&gt;
When performing a cold migration, the error “Incompatible device 
backing specified for device” will appear if the optical disc drive is 
misconfigured. To reconfigure the drive in vSphere:&lt;br /&gt;

1. Right-click the virtual machine and then click “Edit Settings.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_04.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;VM Settings&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32643&quot; height=&quot;276&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_04.jpg&quot; width=&quot;300&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
2. Select the CD- or DVD-ROM from the Hardware tab. Choose “Client Device” as the device type and then click “OK.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_05.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Choose Client Device&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32644&quot; height=&quot;87&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_05.jpg&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
If the above steps fail to resolve the error, check the VMX file 
associated with the virtual machine to see if the optical device is 
connected in the configuration data. If the file indicates that the 
optical device is connected, remove and then re-add the CD- or DVD-ROM 
from the same window.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_06.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;VMX File&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-32645&quot; height=&quot;76&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/05/compatibility_06.jpg&quot; width=&quot;300&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
TEAC DV-28 series DVD-ROM drives can also cause, at random, an ESX or
 ESXi 4.0 host to stop responding in vCenter Server or refuse 
connections from VMware vSphere. While certain models are incompatible 
with ESX/ESXi altogether, upgrading the outdated firmware on some 
devices will resolve the issue and restore function to the host. (Some 
manufacturers, such as &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.dell.com/support/drivers/us/en/04/DriverDetails/DriverFileFormats?c=us&amp;amp;s=bsd&amp;amp;cs=04&amp;amp;l=en&amp;amp;DriverId=R190288&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Dell&quot;&gt;Dell&lt;/a&gt;, provide firmware flash upgrades for certain TEAC DV-28 series models.)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Virtual Disks&lt;/h3&gt;
When attempting to run a virtual machine created in another VMware 
virtualization platform, such as VMware Workstation, the VM will fail to
 start and the message “Unsupported and/or invalid disk type” will 
appear. This error occurs because the virtual disk formats associated 
with the different virtualization platforms are incompatible with 
ESX/ESXi.&lt;br /&gt;

You can use VMware vCenter Converter to convert the disk and import the virtual machine into vSphere. This is a called a &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/vmware-v2v-migration&quot; title=&quot;VMware V2V Migration Guide&quot;&gt;cold migration in ESXi&lt;/a&gt; (V2V).&lt;br /&gt;

Running the following command from the server console will also 
convert the virtual disk to a format that ESX/ESXi can understand:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
vmkfstools -i &amp;lt;original file&amp;gt;.vmdk &amp;lt;new file&amp;gt;.vmdk&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
Networking&lt;/h3&gt;
VMware vSphere can run virtual standard switches (vSwitches), which apply to a single host, or &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/videos/vmware-vsphere-distributed-switch&quot; title=&quot;Creating a vSphere Distributed Switch&quot;&gt;virtual distributed switches (vDS)&lt;/a&gt;,
 which span across multiple hosts. If the license is incompatible with 
the vDS feature, vCenter Server will fail when creating a distributed 
switch. To work around this error in vSphere 5, you must upgrade each 
host to the Enterprise Plus license.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Conclusions&lt;/h3&gt;
It’s important to keep in mind although there are workarounds for 
some compatibility issues, if a critical hardware device isn’t supported
 by the hypervisor, there’s little recourse. For example, if the 
hypervisor requires a 64-bit CPU but your system only includes a 32-bit 
processor, you have no choice but to upgrade the hardware or stick with 
an older version of ESX/ESXi.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/1656889397315680629/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-5-most-common-vmware-compatibility.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1656889397315680629'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1656889397315680629'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-5-most-common-vmware-compatibility.html' title='Top 5 Most Common VMware Compatibility Issues (and How to Work Around Them)'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-401413794129130188</id><published>2012-09-04T09:47:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T09:47:37.025-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Protect Yourself from the “Flame” Virus</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Recently, reports have been circulating that a virus, called “Flame,”
 has been infecting users in the Middle East, particularly Iran. This 
has led many to conclude it is the work of Israel’s engineers. Experts 
also suggest there is more evidence to suggest this including the links 
of this malware with previous malware targeting Iran. The official name 
for Flame is W32.Flamer because it targets 32bit Windows PC users.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
The “Flame” Virus Looks to be the Work of Professionals&lt;/h2&gt;
According to the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.usatoday.com/news/world/story/2012-05-29/flame-virus-middle-east/55264632/1&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; title=&quot;External Link - USA Today&quot;&gt;USA Today&lt;/a&gt;,
 the reason for the suspicion existing about Israel being pinned as the 
culprit is that Iran has been particularly affected by it. This led 
Kaspersky Lab to conclude engineers in Israel should claim 
responsibility as there is distrust and animosity between the two 
nations.&lt;br /&gt;

Another virus launched last November, called Stuxnet, that targeted 
nuclear centrifuges in Iran and Flame. It shares a lot of similarity to 
Flame, according to reports. It has been speculated for quite a while 
now that engineers from Israel created Stuxnet.&lt;br /&gt;

The New York Times reported last November, the virus was precisely created to &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.nytimes.com/2010/11/19/world/middleeast/19stuxnet.html?pagewanted=all&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; title=&quot;External Link - disrupt Iran’s nuclear program&quot;&gt;disrupt Iran’s nuclear program&lt;/a&gt;. It caused nuclear centrifuges to be sent out of control.&lt;br /&gt;

The Russian anti-virus company, Kaspersky Lab, also claims 
responsibility for the discovery of its existence, as reported by a 
company &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.kaspersky.com/about/news/virus/2012/Kaspersky_Lab_and_ITU_Research_Reveals_New_Advanced_Cyber_Threat/&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; title=&quot;External Link - news brief&quot;&gt;news brief&lt;/a&gt;. However, other anti-virus companies have also been analyzing it and trying to address its reach as well.&lt;br /&gt;

According to USA Today, a unit within Iran’s communication and 
information technology ministry claimed it has anti-virus software 
capable of identifying and removing it:&lt;br /&gt;

“Tehran has not said whether it lost any data to the virus, but a 
unit of the Iranian communications and information technology ministry 
said it had produced an anti-virus capable of identifying and removing 
Flame from its computers.”&lt;br /&gt;

When Israel’s Vice Premier Moshe Yaalon didn’t outright dismiss 
Israel’s responsibility for it when asked about its significance. This 
leads to further conclusion Israel’s hands were at work here.&lt;br /&gt;

“Israel is blessed with high technology, and we boast tools that open all sorts of opportunities for us,” he said.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
What Makes “Flame” Stand Out Among Malware&lt;/h2&gt;
Flame is particularly alarming in terms of the security concerns it 
poses for users on the recipient end of it. It really shows just how 
exposed anyone of us can be online if we do not take precautions. 
Examples of damage it can do include allowing its creators to take 
screenshots, log keystrokes, and even steal data from mobile devices via
 Bluetooth.&lt;br /&gt;

“It can be used to spy on everything that a user is doing,” said &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.usatoday.com/news/world/story/2012-05-29/flame-virus-middle-east/55264632/1&quot; title=&quot;External Link - researcher Roel Schouwenberg&quot;&gt;researcher Roel Schouwenberg&lt;/a&gt; in the USA Today report.&lt;br /&gt;

I recently spoke to the director of Norton’s Star Program, Kevin Haley, about the threat and what risks it poses for end users.&lt;br /&gt;

Besides its ability to spy on users; take screenshots of user 
activity and send it back for analysis; and steal files, it can also be 
improved upon or patched.&lt;br /&gt;

Haley said that its creators can write modules adding functionality 
to it over time. This means they do not have to create new malware but 
simply modify Flame for added functionality end threats.&lt;br /&gt;

“It was clearly built so it could be added upon again and again.”&lt;br /&gt;

He also pointed out its complexity when analyzing it and looking at 
its size. The actual file size is about 200MB, which makes it much 
larger in scope than most other &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/malware-attacks-prompt-tighter-security-measures&quot; title=&quot;Malware Attacks Prompt Tighter Security Measures&quot;&gt;malware&lt;/a&gt;. It also makes Flame harder to detect in many cases due to users thinking it is a legitimate application or program.&lt;br /&gt;

“It is like 20 times as large as Stuxnet. It is bigger and more 
modular, Haley said. “It is build like multiple people worked on it and 
didn’t know what other people were doing.”&lt;br /&gt;

What he meant by calling its engineering modular was that multiple 
groups of professional engineers were probably contracted to create it 
in different steps. Then their work was put together into what is now 
known as Flame.&lt;br /&gt;

Haley also indicated that in his opinion it probably took about 6 
months to create and it will take Norton months to fully comprehend it. 
Norton has only been analyzing it for the last few days although there 
are indications it was around for at least two years in one shape or 
form.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
A Disguised File&lt;/h2&gt;
Haley said that its creators found clever ways to hide it inside 
systems it infects. Because of its large size, it may trick users into 
thinking it is harmless, but also in the way it runs on machines without
 showing indications of its approach.&lt;br /&gt;

“It tries to hide itself inside other applications to disguise 
itself,” he said. “It also hides itself inside another process inside 
the computer.&lt;br /&gt;

“If you weren’t examining it closely, you would think it is doing 
things that are harmless. It has functionality that normal programs have
 to make users think it is not doing anything not unique.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Command-and-Control Server&lt;/h2&gt;
The way its authors use Flame is through a command-and-control server
 (C&amp;amp;C). Its authors give it instructions through this structure to 
accomplish certain tasks.&lt;br /&gt;

“Typically once it gets on a machine it will report back to CMC 
server and wait for instructions,” haley said. “The author gives 
commands like show what documents they are and these are the ones I want
 you to copy.”&lt;br /&gt;

By the way, Symantec has provided further analysis of the virus in a blog posting on the company’s website titled “&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.symantec.com/connect/blogs/painting-picture-w32flamer&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Painting a Picture of @32.Flamer&quot;&gt;Painting a Picture of @32.Flamer&lt;/a&gt;.”
 This analysis points out that Flame is actually a whole platform and 
not just a file with a single function. It includes a Web server, a 
database server, and secure shell communications. It also includes a 
scripting editor.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
How to Protect Yourself from the “Flame” Threat&lt;/h2&gt;
What makes Flame such a threat is that it may have the potential of 
infecting users who have great firewalls or are not even connected 
online. Malware can, for instance, be &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/videos/protect-usb-drives-bitlocker-to-go&quot; title=&quot;Protect USB Drives with BitLocker&quot;&gt;infected from a USB drive&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

However, Haley said that anyone with an updated version of Norton’s 
or Symantec’s anti-malware programs should be safe (these two product 
lines are linked to the same company, but Symantec is geared for 
enterprise users while Norton is geared for regular computing users). It
 should automatically detect and remove Flame. He even pointed out that 
competitor products are also able to remove it now. It is the users who 
are not protected that should make sure their system is safe.&lt;br /&gt;

Haley described how in 2011 alone there were over 400 million unique threats and he expects 2012 to show greater figures. &lt;br /&gt;

He thinks that a layered approach is needed with anti-virus software,
 firewalls, and other tools. He described one of these tools, which 
Norton uses, as the intrusion prevention systems (IPS).&lt;br /&gt;

“IPS intrusion prevention systems looks for patterns in network 
traffic,” Haley said. “It will detect malware unlike firewall that just 
blocks it.”&lt;br /&gt;

Despite Haley’s enthusiasm for anti-virus software being able to 
remove it, keep in mind that he did also say its creators have the 
ability to modify it and add functionality to it. Take that as you will,
 but it may mean that it still can pose a danger to any user. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Conclusion&lt;/h2&gt;
Viruses like Flame show the challenges users and companies face every
 day when targeted by calculating and skillful threats. However, do not 
expect the average hacker to be able to create something this 
sophisticated. A group like Anonymous may have the potential over time 
so do not rule the idea out. However, this was most likely the work of 
engineers being hired full time to work on it over a period of numerous 
months as Haley pointed out.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/401413794129130188/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-protect-yourself-from-flame-virus.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/401413794129130188'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/401413794129130188'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-protect-yourself-from-flame-virus.html' title='How to Protect Yourself from the “Flame” Virus'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-5369103373434258968</id><published>2012-09-04T03:27:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T03:27:43.214-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Installing WordPress on IIS7 – Part 2</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Now that we’ve installed and setup a WordPress blog on IIS 7 let’s get into the details and enhance it a bit. &lt;br /&gt;

First we’ll set up search engine friendly URLs for our WordPress on 
IIS 7 to increase SEO. Then we’ll learn how to take advantage of the 
many WordPress plugins. And finally I’ll talk about setting up IIS 
Authentication for our WordPress site.&lt;br /&gt;

If you missed it, here’s &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/installing-wordpress-on-iis7&quot;&gt;Part 1 of Installing WordPress on IIS 7&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Search Engine Friendly URLs for WordPress on IIS7&lt;/h2&gt;
Now if you’re interested in getting free and highly targeted traffic 
to your website, you can’t do much better than the search engines. As of
 this writing most search engines put a good deal of weight on having 
friendly URLs that include what the page is about. &lt;br /&gt;

For example, in our current install if you click on the default post you will notice that the url is:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
http://domainname/?p=1&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/blockquote&gt;
This doesn’t really tell the search engines anything about the page 
so they will not use it in their ranking weight.  Now what if this was 
changed to something like:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
http://domainname/hello-world&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/blockquote&gt;
The search engines would accord more ranking weight for the keywords 
&quot;Hello World&quot; that are in the url. This is the reason I had you install 
the URL Rewrite module, because there is a little code you can include 
to help make the URLs friendly to both search engines and users.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;1.&lt;/strong&gt; Browse to the directory you have installed WordPress in and create/open the &lt;strong&gt;web.config&lt;/strong&gt; file in Notepad.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 1&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;459&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp18.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 1&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;2.&lt;/strong&gt; Now navigate to the &lt;strong&gt;&amp;lt;System.Webserver&amp;gt;&lt;/strong&gt; element and copy the code below into it and save it.&lt;br /&gt;

&amp;lt;rewrite&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;   &amp;lt;rules&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;  &amp;lt;rule name=&quot;Main Rule&quot; stopProcessing=&quot;true&quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;  &amp;lt;match url=&quot;.*&quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;  &amp;lt;conditions logicalGrouping=&quot;MatchAll&quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;  &amp;lt;add input=&quot;{REQUEST_FILENAME}&quot; matchType=&quot;IsFile&quot; negate=&quot;true&quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;  &amp;lt;add input=&quot;{REQUEST_FILENAME}&quot; matchType=&quot;IsDirectory&quot; negate=&quot;true&quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;   &amp;lt;/conditions&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;   &amp;lt;action type=&quot;Rewrite&quot; url=&quot;index.php&quot; /&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;   &amp;lt;/rule&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp; &amp;nbsp;   &amp;lt;/rules&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/rewrite&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;NOTE:&lt;/strong&gt; Your web.config file might look very different
 from mine due to any other options that are installed on your server. 
The main thing is, if you already have a &amp;lt;rewrite&amp;gt; section then 
place the rules within that, if you don’t then just put in the whole 
section below anywhere between &amp;lt;System.Webserver&amp;gt; 
&amp;lt;/System.Webserver&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 2&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;261&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp19.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 2&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;3.&lt;/strong&gt; Now in your WordPress dashboard go ahead and click on &lt;strong&gt;Settings&lt;/strong&gt; in the top right&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 3&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;363&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp20.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 3&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;4.&lt;/strong&gt; Now click &lt;strong&gt;Permalinks&lt;/strong&gt; across the middle of the screen&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 4&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;362&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp21.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 4&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;5.&lt;/strong&gt; Under &lt;strong&gt;Common Settings&lt;/strong&gt; go down to &lt;strong&gt;Custom Structure&lt;/strong&gt; and place the following in the text field:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/%postname%/&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

If you want to put other variables into the url structure you can find a full list at:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://codex.wordpress.org/Using_Permalinks&quot; title=&quot;External Link - http://codex.wordpress.org/Using_Permalinks&quot;&gt;http://codex.wordpress.org/Using_Permalinks&lt;/a&gt; under &lt;strong&gt;Structure Tags&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

After you configure your structure click on &lt;strong&gt;Save Changes&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 5&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;368&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp22.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 5&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;6.&lt;/strong&gt; Now let’s go back to our site home page and click
 on the default post, you will now see that the url is now 
http://domainname.com/hello-world/&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;middle&quot; alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 6&quot; border=&quot;0&quot; height=&quot;484&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/dave_wp/wp23.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 6&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

That’s it, using this will almost certainly increase your search 
engine visibility along with making your post URLs easier to remember 
for average users.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
WordPress Plugins&lt;/h2&gt;
One of the best things about WordPress and why it has become so 
popular is that it allows for great flexibility by allowing the use of 
plugins. Plugins are at the heart of WordPress’s extensibility because 
they are for the most part written by the user community. This means 
that when someone needs some kind of functionality more than likely 
someone else has needed it and written a plug-in for it.&lt;br /&gt;

While I cannot cover all the plugins out there, let me mention some 
tips if you have any problems with using them on your site. If you try a
 plugin and have issues take a quick look at the following:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;PHP extension needed&lt;/strong&gt; – if you kept your PHP 
installation lean you might not have all the extensions needed and 
configured.  Make sure that you review the requirements for the plug-in 
and you have the extension loaded.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;File permissions&lt;/strong&gt; – watch the permissions in the directory that the plug-in is installed. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Here’s where you can learn more about plugins: &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://codex.wordpress.org/Plugins&quot; title=&quot;External Link - http://codex.wordpress.org/Plugins&quot;&gt;http://codex.wordpress.org/Plugins&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

And here’s where you can search the 3,000+ WordPress plugins: &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://wordpress.org/extend/plugins/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - http://wordpress.org/extend/plugins/&quot;&gt;http://wordpress.org/extend/plugins/&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
IIS Authentication for WordPress&lt;/h2&gt;
WordPress uses its own users and rights system, but there might be a 
situation where you want to use IIS authentication instead to seamlessly
 integrating the WordPress blog with the rest of a site. While this is 
very site specific and I will not go into detail here on how to do it, 
Mike Volodarsky has a great write-up on it using a plug-in that he 
wrote.&lt;br /&gt;

You can find that information on his site: &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://mvolo.com/blogs/serverside/archive/2007/08/12/IIS-Authentication-plugin-for-the-Wordpress-PHP-blogging-engine.aspx&quot; title=&quot;External Link - IIS 7.0 Server-Side&quot;&gt;IIS 7.0 Server-Side&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Summary&lt;/h2&gt;
You have now installed and configured WordPress on IIS7 and even 
changed the URL structure to a custom one that will help you grow your 
blog through increased search engine traffic. Now go look through some 
plugins and start adding content to your site!&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/5369103373434258968/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/installing-wordpress-on-iis7-part-2.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/5369103373434258968'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/5369103373434258968'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/installing-wordpress-on-iis7-part-2.html' title='Installing WordPress on IIS7 – Part 2'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2533564838673623842</id><published>2012-09-04T03:26:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T03:26:27.527-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Installing WordPress on IIS 7 – Part 1</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
In the past few weeks I have been writing a lot about using open 
source software such as PHP and MySQL on IIS7 to get you ready for 
today. This article will take the knowledge and experience of those 
articles and apply them to install one of the most popular open source 
blogging and CMS software products: WordPress.&lt;br /&gt;

WordPress is always being updated but for this article we will be 
using the 2.6 version. A word about the versions, this article should 
stay applicable through the usual feature updates, if there is a major 
code overhaul there might be issues, but as long as you are in 2.x fork 
you should be good following this article.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
WordPress Requirements&lt;/h2&gt;
As I said, my earlier articles were in preparation for this article 
so if you have not already done so please go back and follow these 
earlier articles to make sure your IIS7 server is ready for WordPress.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/install-phpmyadmin-on-iis7-and-server-2008/2008-09-16/&quot;&gt;Install PHP on Server 2008&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/install-mysql-on-iis7/2008-09-10/&quot;&gt;Install MySQL on Server 2008&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/iis7-url-rewrite-extension-on-windows-server-2008/2008-09-25/&quot;&gt;Install URL Rewrite Extension on IIS7&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Now with those applications and module installed we are ready to move forward!&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Download WordPress&lt;/h2&gt;
Now that we are going to install WordPress let’s download the files 
and get them on the server.  You can either FTP these up to your server 
or as I am going to do, just download them directly from the server.&lt;br /&gt;

You can get the latest files here: &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.wordpress.org/download&quot; title=&quot;External Link - http://www.wordpress.org/download&quot;&gt;http://www.wordpress.org/download&lt;/a&gt;. You should see a big download button on the top of the right column, go ahead and start the download.&lt;br /&gt;

WordPress is famous for the 5-minute install, which normally is quite
 correct for Apache servers.  Our install might take a little longer, 
but shouldn’t be too bad.&lt;br /&gt;

Now that you have downloaded the files, go ahead and unzip/FTP them to the site directory on the server.&lt;br /&gt;

I am going to be installing this under a local domain called 
wordpresstestinstall.com that is setup to resolve locally for my server.
  The physical path of the directory is under the directory structure 
specified in the php.ini.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;NOTE: This is a biggie, back in the Install PHP article there
 was a section that had you modify the php.ini with the top most level 
of the directory structure that PHP would function within.  You MUST 
have this WordPress install under that directory structure for it to 
function.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Configure MySQL for WordPress&lt;/h2&gt;
Now, we have to setup a MySQL database for WordPress to use. There are several ways to do this, especially if you used my &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/install-phpmyadmin-on-iis7-and-server-2008/2008-09-16/&quot;&gt;Install phpMyAdmin article&lt;/a&gt;, you can use that or you can use the MySQL command line interface.&lt;br /&gt;

I will actually walk you through both, we will start with phpMyAdmin,
 but if you want to use the command line sequence instead skip this next
 section.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Setup MySQL Database with phpMyAdmin&lt;/h2&gt;
If you read my earlier articles then you know that phpMyAdmin can be 
used to create and manage MySQL databases in a somewhat easy to use GUI.
 If you have installed phpMyAdmin let’s go ahead and use that first, by 
opening it in your web browser.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;1.&lt;/strong&gt; First login with your MySQL username and password.&lt;br /&gt;

Unless you have setup other high level users this will almost certainly have the username of &lt;strong&gt;root&lt;/strong&gt; and whatever password you used to install MySQL then hit &lt;strong&gt;Go&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp01.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 1&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27949&quot; height=&quot;465&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp01.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 1&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;2.&lt;/strong&gt; On this page you can type the name of the database into the field under &lt;strong&gt;Create new database&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

For this demo I am just going to use &lt;strong&gt;wordpress&lt;/strong&gt;, but you may want to use something a little less generic.  After typing in the name, click on &lt;strong&gt;Create&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp02.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27950&quot; height=&quot;320&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp02.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 2&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;3.&lt;/strong&gt; Now we are going to create a user for the &lt;strong&gt;wordpress&lt;/strong&gt; database, go ahead and click &lt;strong&gt;Privileges&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp03.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27951&quot; height=&quot;368&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp03.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 3&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;4.&lt;/strong&gt; Now click on &lt;strong&gt;Add a new User&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp04.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 4&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27952&quot; height=&quot;443&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp04.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 4&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;5.&lt;/strong&gt; Now fill in the details for your new user.  For my demo I am using the following information:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;User name: wpuser&lt;br /&gt;
Host: Any host&lt;br /&gt;
Password: password&lt;br /&gt;
re-type: password&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The rest of the settings I am going to leave at the default and then click &lt;strong&gt;Go&lt;/strong&gt; at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp05.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 5&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27953&quot; height=&quot;450&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp05.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 5&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;6.&lt;/strong&gt; After creation scroll down to the section &lt;strong&gt;Database-specific privileges&lt;/strong&gt; and in the dropdown choose the database you created earlier. In this instance it is &lt;strong&gt;wordpress&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

Once you scroll down you will see the page load up all the possible 
privileges for that database. Since I want this user to have full rights
 on this database I am going to select &lt;strong&gt;Check All&lt;/strong&gt; and then click &lt;strong&gt;Go&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp06.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 6&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27954&quot; height=&quot;461&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp06.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 6&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;7.&lt;/strong&gt; Ok that’s it, you should now have the following information available for your WordPress install:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Database Name: wordpress&lt;br /&gt;
Database User: wpuser&lt;br /&gt;
DB User Password: password&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Use MySQL Command Line Interface&lt;/h2&gt;
This section is only if you didn’t use the phpMyAdmin interface to 
setup your MySQL database. We are going to setup the exact same database
 as before — just without phpMyAdmin.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;1.&lt;/strong&gt; Go to the start menu and open up the MySQL program folder and click on &lt;strong&gt;MySQL Command Line Client&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp07.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 7&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27955&quot; height=&quot;500&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp07.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 7&quot; width=&quot;399&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;2.&lt;/strong&gt; You will need to enter the root password and hit &lt;strong&gt;Enter&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp08.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 8&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27956&quot; height=&quot;330&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp08.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 8&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;3.&lt;/strong&gt; At the prompt type in: &lt;strong&gt;CREATE DATABASE wordpress&lt;/strong&gt;; then hit &lt;strong&gt;Enter&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp09.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 9&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27957&quot; height=&quot;329&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp09.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 9&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;4.&lt;/strong&gt; Now we will create and assign the user:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;GRANT ALL PRIVILEGES ON databasename.* TO &quot;wpuser&quot;@&quot;localhost&quot;&lt;br /&gt;
IDENTIFIED BY &quot;password&quot;;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
then hit &lt;strong&gt;Enter&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Note: To go to a second line just hit Enter without a &quot;;&quot; at the end of a line.  The &quot;;&quot; signals the end of the command.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp10.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 10&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27958&quot; height=&quot;330&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp10.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 10&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;5.&lt;/strong&gt; Now type the following:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;FLUSH PRIVILEGES;&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
then hit &lt;strong&gt;Enter&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;6.&lt;/strong&gt; Type &lt;strong&gt;Exit&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;7.&lt;/strong&gt; Ok that’s it, you should now have the following information available for your WordPress install:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Database Name: wordpress&lt;br /&gt;
Database User: wpuser&lt;br /&gt;
DB User Password: password&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Run the WordPress Install Script&lt;/h2&gt;
Ok the moment of truth is upon us.  First we are going to modify the wp-config-sample.php file with some information.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;1.&lt;/strong&gt; Navigate to the directory you placed your files and find the file named &lt;strong&gt;wp-config-sample.php&lt;/strong&gt; and open it with Notepad.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp11.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 11&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27959&quot; height=&quot;560&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp11.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 11&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;2.&lt;/strong&gt; You need to modify the following fields in the 
file.  Please note I am using my values in the screenshot, replace them 
with your specific information.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;DB_NAME: wordpress&lt;br /&gt;
DB_USER: wpuser&lt;br /&gt;
DB_PASSWORD: password&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

In the next section replace &lt;strong&gt;‘put your unique phrase here’&lt;/strong&gt; with a different random phase for each, you don’t have to remember them so just make it up.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp12.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 12&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27960&quot; height=&quot;440&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp12.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 12&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;3.&lt;/strong&gt; Save the file as &lt;strong&gt;wp-config.php&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;4.&lt;/strong&gt; Type in the following to start the script replacing &lt;strong&gt;wordpresstestinstall.com&lt;/strong&gt; with your domain.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;http://wordpresstestinstall.com/wp-admin/install.php&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You will find that the WordPress welcome screen is now shown.  You can now configure the following — use your own info:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Blog Title:&lt;/strong&gt; WordPress Test Install&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Your E-mail:&lt;/strong&gt; email&lt;br /&gt;
Click &lt;strong&gt;Install WordPress&lt;/strong&gt; after you are done.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp13.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 13&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27961&quot; height=&quot;383&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp13.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 13&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;5.&lt;/strong&gt; You should now see a screen that says &lt;strong&gt;Success!&lt;/strong&gt; with your username (always &lt;strong&gt;admin&lt;/strong&gt;) and a random password you can change later.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Make sure you write down or copy the password.&lt;/strong&gt; There is also a small button at the bottom that says &lt;strong&gt;Log In&lt;/strong&gt;, go ahead and click that button.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp14.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 14&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27962&quot; height=&quot;423&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp14.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 14&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;6.&lt;/strong&gt; You will now be asked for your username and 
password that was given on the last page (I told you to write it down). 
So fill those in and click &lt;strong&gt;Log In&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp15.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 15&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27963&quot; height=&quot;442&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp15.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 15&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;7.&lt;/strong&gt; Now if you login and see a 403 error screen, more than likely it means your default document isn’t setup for &lt;strong&gt;index.php&lt;/strong&gt; in IIS Manager.&lt;br /&gt;

If you are seeing the WordPress dashboard, then skip to the next step.  For those that need to, do the following:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Open IIS Manager&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click on the site you are working with&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;In the center content area click on &lt;strong&gt;Default Documents&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Once in Default Documents click on &lt;strong&gt;Add…&lt;/strong&gt; in the right pane&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;In the Add Default Document Box type &lt;strong&gt;Index.php&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;OK&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Close IIS Manager&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Refresh your browser or login again to &lt;strong&gt;http://domainname.com/wp-admin/&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;8.&lt;/strong&gt; Congratulations, you should now be in the WordPress Dashboard! You can also click the little button that says &lt;strong&gt;Visit Site&lt;/strong&gt; and you will see the default post and theme loaded on your site.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp16.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 16&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27964&quot; height=&quot;369&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp16.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 16&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp17.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 17&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-27965&quot; height=&quot;358&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2008/10/wp17.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 - 17&quot; width=&quot;597&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Installing WordPress on IIS 7  – Part 2&lt;/h2&gt;
Ok, now we have a WordPress blog setup and running on IIS7, with the 
core basic functionality. In my next article we’ll go a little further 
and enhance it a bit. In &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/installing-wordpress-on-iis7-2/2008-10-09/&quot;&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Installing WordPress on IIS 7 – Part 2&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/a&gt; I’ll show you how to:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Set up search engine friendly URLs for WordPress on IIS7 to increase your SEO&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Take advantage of the many WordPress plugins&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Set up IIS Authentication for WordPress&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2533564838673623842/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/installing-wordpress-on-iis-7-part-1.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2533564838673623842'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2533564838673623842'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/installing-wordpress-on-iis-7-part-1.html' title='Installing WordPress on IIS 7 – Part 1'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-7272999035139979314</id><published>2012-09-04T02:57:00.001-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:57:22.722-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Configure and Manage OWA on Exchange Server 2007</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Mobile messaging has become widely used since the release of &lt;strong&gt;Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack 2 (SP2)&lt;/strong&gt;,
 which provided much needed functionality. SP2 has been able to offer 
remote access users much of the same functionality as users working 
within the network.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Outlook Web Access (OWA)&lt;/strong&gt; provides remote users 
access to their messaging system via any compliant web browser, making 
mobile messaging universally accessible to any user with a browser 
enabled device.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;center&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Anywhere Access&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28496&quot; height=&quot;291&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2007/12/AnywhereAccess.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Anywhere Access&quot; width=&quot;498&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;/center&gt;
The release of Outlook Web Access 2007 further increases the functions available to the remote user, including:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Out of office messaging&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Scheduling assistant&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Access to SharePoint documents within the browser&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Web-ready document viewing within the browser&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Access to managed e-mail folders&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Voice and fax access via UM&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Search access to GAL&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; Access to &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/save-time-and-eliminate-spam-integrating-rss-feeds-in-outlook-2007&quot; title=&quot;RSS Feeds in Outlook 2007&quot;&gt;RSS feeds&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;span id=&quot;more-369&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Configuration and Management Tools&lt;/h3&gt;
OWA is made available via the Exchange Server, deployed in the client
 access server role. There are five tools available to manage and 
configure OWA:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt; the Exchange Management Console graphic interface&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; the IIS Manager&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; direct registry configuration settings using the Registry Editor&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; the Outlook Web Access Web Administration tool&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt; the Exchange Management Shell which provides command line and automated plug-ins&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Some settings are only configurable via certain tools; settings, such as the &lt;strong&gt;PublicClientTimeout, TrustedClientTimeout,&lt;/strong&gt; and &lt;strong&gt;SSLOffloaded&lt;/strong&gt; values can only be configured by using the Registry Editor.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Configuring the Virtual Directories&lt;/h3&gt;
When you install the client server access role on the Exchange 
Server, four default virtual directories are created to be used by 
Outlook Web Access. The directories are:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;/owa&lt;/strong&gt; – which is used for mailbox access&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;/Public&lt;/strong&gt; – used to access public folders&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;/Exchange&lt;/strong&gt; – used to access mailboxes and provide backwards compatibility&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;/Exadmin&lt;/strong&gt; – which provides access for administrative settings and properties&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
These directories are usually sufficient for most deployments, but 
you can create additional virtual directories if you require them using 
the &lt;strong&gt;New-OWAVirtualDirectory&lt;/strong&gt; command. Note that the forms based auth and secure socket layer encryption enabled by default in the &lt;strong&gt;/owa&lt;/strong&gt; virtual directory will not apply to the new directory and these security services must be enabled manually.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;
Simplifying the OWA URL&lt;/h3&gt;
Users like simplicity and simplicity reduces the need for tech 
support from the IT helpdesk. The URL that users use to access their 
mailbox via OWA can be simplified using the IIS manager. The process 
simply employs an http redirect and you can also set the IIS web page to
 automatically send the user to the secure http URL.&lt;br /&gt;

Simply create the html redirect code to &lt;strong&gt;URL=https://servername/exchange&lt;/strong&gt;, open the IIS manager and program the redirect in the properties of the default web site.&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;
Modifying Attachment Handling Settings&lt;/h3&gt;
A new service introduced in Exchange Server 2007 is &lt;strong&gt;Web Ready Document Viewing&lt;/strong&gt;,
 which allows users accessing the messaging servers via OWA to view 
certain types of common documents rendered within the browser.&lt;br /&gt;

The document types include Word, PDF, Excel and PowerPoint. You can use either the &lt;strong&gt;Exchange Management Console&lt;/strong&gt; or the &lt;strong&gt;Set-OwaVirtualDirectory&lt;/strong&gt;
 command under the manager shell. In the console, the settings are 
located under Web Ready Document Viewing settings under the OWA 
properties in the server properties Client Access settings.&lt;br /&gt;

Public and private file access can be configured to either allow 
access, block access, or force save the file to the client’s device 
before viewing. All attached files with either a default or a known file
 extension, are by default set to one of these three options.&lt;br /&gt;

You can also choose one of the options for unkown file extensions. Again, you can either use the &lt;strong&gt;Exchange Management Console&lt;/strong&gt; or the &lt;strong&gt;Set-OwaVirtualDirectory&lt;/strong&gt; command under the manager shell.&lt;br /&gt;

In the console you can set the file name extensions in the allow, block or force save list under the &lt;strong&gt;Direct File Access&lt;/strong&gt; settings page. To modify the list you must select &lt;strong&gt;Customize direct file access&lt;/strong&gt;
 and Direct file access must be enabled. There are two sets of settings,
 one for public file access and one for private file access.&lt;br /&gt;

Available only in Outlook Web Access Premium client, SharePoint and 
Windows File Share (UNC) integration provides read-only access to 
documents. Administrators can configure OWA to allow or block access on 
individual servers, allow or block access from private or public 
computers, create a list of remote servers to be treated as internal 
(only documents on internal host can be accessed via OWA), and allow or 
block access using segmentation.&lt;br /&gt;

To set access to individual servers simply add the host name to the block or allow list under &lt;strong&gt;Remote File Servers&lt;/strong&gt; in the OWA configuration settings. You can also use the &lt;strong&gt;Set-OwaVirtualDirectory&lt;/strong&gt; command in the manager shell.&lt;br /&gt;

To allow or block private or public computers, enable or disable the 
Windows SharePoint Services or Windows File Shares under the OWA 
setting. You can also enable or disable via the command shell using the 
Set-OwaVirtualDirectory command.&lt;br /&gt;

To add a domain suffix to be treated as internal, simply add the 
suffix to the list of domain suffixes to be treated as internal under 
the Remote File Server tab in OWA settings. To set access to individual 
virtual directories or to individual users you must use the command 
shell commands Set-OwaVirtualDirectory and Set-CASMailbox respectively.&lt;br /&gt;

Other configuration and management tasks for OWA include: configuring
 authentication methods, modifying language and character handling 
settings, configuring Gzip compression settings and disabling Web 
Beacons.&lt;br /&gt;
But we’ll save these for another time …&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/7272999035139979314/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-configure-and-manage-owa-on.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7272999035139979314'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7272999035139979314'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-configure-and-manage-owa-on.html' title='How to Configure and Manage OWA on Exchange Server 2007'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-7856384392797243662</id><published>2012-09-04T02:52:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:52:43.514-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Top 10 New Features in Exchange Server 2010</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
It’s difficult to read any technical journal or website today without
 finding stories on cloud computing. In an effort to reduce costs and 
network complexity, some organizations are opting to move at least some 
software or services to the cloud.&lt;br /&gt;

In response to this need, Microsoft released the first new version of &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.microsoft.com/exchange/2010/en/us/default.aspx&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Microsoft Exchange&quot;&gt;Microsoft Exchange&lt;/a&gt; since 2006.&lt;br /&gt;

Exchange 2010 has a lot to offer including more flexibility, a better user experience, simplified administration, and much more.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
What’s New in Microsoft Exchange Server 2010&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/Exchange-Server-2010-Training-P89.aspx&quot;&gt;&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;Exchange Server 2010 Training&quot; class=&quot;alignright size-full wp-image-11623&quot; height=&quot;103&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/05/exchangelogo.png&quot; title=&quot;Exchange Server 2010 Training&quot; width=&quot;225&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;Exchange has been known for its extensive feature list, including: email, calendars, contacts, and storage management.&lt;br /&gt;

With the 2010 update, they have addressed a few long standing issues 
and included additional functionality to help solve a crop of new, 
modern business problems.&lt;br /&gt;

The benefits? Unification, lowered costs, higher availability, and improved security.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s review the top 10 new features.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-11371&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;


&lt;h3&gt;
1. Webmail&lt;/h3&gt;
The new outlook web access (OWA) webmail client allows for delegation
 of administrative tasks. It also includes updated self-help options, 
intended to reduce help desk calls and ultimately, costs.&lt;br /&gt;

The Exchange Control Panel allows users to set their own email 
rule-set, create distribution groups, and track message delivery. And, 
if you lose your phone, you can remote wipe from your browser.&lt;br /&gt;

Another import feature is the inclusion of support for Firefox and Safari as well as Internet Explorer.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
2. Legal Hold&lt;/h3&gt;
By now, most corporate employees are aware that email should not be 
considered private. In fact, email has been subpoenaed for court cases.&lt;br /&gt;

But corporate policies that outline conflicting message retention 
dictates make balancing legal requirements against increasing storage 
costs, a challenge. In response, Exchange now has a legal hold feature 
that allows for the retention of email, even if archived or deleted.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
3. Multi-Mailbox Search&lt;/h3&gt;
As a tie-in to the legal hold feature, the multi-mailbox search 
function will allow for searches spanning multiple users’ inboxes. This 
feature will prove useful for enterprises that need to search their 
entire systems, perhaps based off a few keywords.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
4. Exchange Control Panel&lt;/h3&gt;
The Exchange Management Console and Exchange Management Shell have 
been joined by the Exchange Control Panel. This is a new, user-level and
 administrator management tool that lets users perform basic tasks, and 
allows admins to perform tasks remotely, using a web interface.&lt;br /&gt;

The more an end user is able to accomplish with help desk intervention, should translate to lower costs.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
5. Database Availability Groups&lt;/h3&gt;
Exchange 2010 introduces the concept of database availability groups.
 The idea is to allow you to designate multiple servers to host copies 
of individual databases. This is a feature designed to provide for a 
type of automatic backup. If one database fails, data can easily be 
restored from one of the availability groups.&lt;br /&gt;

This will definitely prove to be an essential tool for business critical email.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
6. Database-Level Failover&lt;/h3&gt;
In previous Exchange versions, a failure would affect an entire 
cluster. But with the 2010 update, a database failure will be contained 
to only that database.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
7. Voice Mail Transcription&lt;/h3&gt;
Instead of storing email messages only as sometimes difficult to 
access attachments, Exchange 2010 now has a speech recognition engine 
that will automatically transcribe voice mail messages.&lt;br /&gt;

The message will still appear as an attachment, which will allow for 
indexing, but will include a written text preview of the message.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
8. Call answering rules&lt;/h3&gt;
At some point, we’ve all encountered an automated attendant, 
directing us to press an option on our keypads to handle call routing. 
This nifty feature has found its way to the end user.&lt;br /&gt;

Call Answering Rules allows employees to setup their own call routing
 rules. For instance, they can send certain calls to voice mail, to 
their cell or home phones, or to ring through to their desks.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
9. Personal Archive&lt;/h3&gt;
Users in this version of Exchange have a new tool to help manage often unruly inboxes.&lt;br /&gt;

Personal archive allows for essentially two mailboxes — a primary 
mailbox and an archive mailbox. The archive is as readily available and 
easily browsed as the primary inbox.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
10. Retention Policies&lt;/h3&gt;
With the new retention policies in Exchange 2010, users can determine
 when messages should expire. This can be done at the folder or 
individual message level.&lt;br /&gt;

Permissions can be tricky and determining resources access 
requirements can be a time-consuming activity. However, using role-based
 access control greatly simplifies this process.&lt;br /&gt;

Rather than assigning permissions, an administrator can indicate 
tasks that a resource will perform. The appropriate permissions will 
then be assigned automatically.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Try Exchange Server 2010&lt;/h2&gt;
If you think this sounds like an impressive feature list, you’re not alone. An &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://finance.yahoo.com/news/Azaleos-Survey-Finds-44-bw-564524667.html?x=0&amp;amp;.v=1&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Azaleos survey&quot;&gt;Azaleos survey&lt;/a&gt;
 finds that 44% of enterprises plan to migrate to Exchange Server 2010 
within 18 months. Which means that you must be ready for Exchange 2010 
if you want to be a part of the action.&lt;br /&gt;

Microsoft is providing you with three ways to &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.microsoft.com/exchange/2010/en/us/try-it.aspx&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - try Exchange 2010&quot;&gt;try Exchange 2010&lt;/a&gt; for free:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;120 day software trial download&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;60 day web-based test drive&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;30 day online trial&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/7856384392797243662/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-10-new-features-in-exchange-server.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7856384392797243662'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7856384392797243662'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-10-new-features-in-exchange-server.html' title='Top 10 New Features in Exchange Server 2010'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6996589776438556714</id><published>2012-09-04T02:47:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:47:46.410-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Cloud Computing 101: Private vs Public Cloud</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
The “cloud” is a term with a debatable meaning. Even in the 
enterprise, surveys have revealed that there are some who have yet to 
develop a clear understanding of cloud computing. A recent survey by 
Virtacore Systems published in this &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.smartbrief.com/news/comptia/storyDetails.jsp?issueid=9EF78C3E-FB6E-49CD-A43B-9AAC489112A1&amp;amp;copyid=7C07F714-6239-49F8-8117-E19B3E4D6B55&quot; title=&quot;External Link - CompTIA SmartBrief&quot;&gt;CompTIA SmartBrief&lt;/a&gt; estimates that 48% of IT professionals at mid-sized companies don’t understand what the term actually means. &lt;br /&gt;

Perhaps some of the confusion comes from the fact that there are two 
types of clouds: public and private. Let’s take a closer look at what 
the main differences are between private and public clouds and later, 
what you should take into consideration when looking for a cloud 
computing provider.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Private vs Public Clouds&lt;/h3&gt;
A public cloud is one in which a service provider serves customers, 
with functionality like applications, infrastructure, and storage. These
 services are available to businesses and individuals over the Internet.
 Public cloud services may be free or offered on a pay-per-usage model; 
sometimes it’s referred to with the -aaS acronym, meaning “as a Service”
 as in IaaS (Infrastructure as a Service), PaaS (Platform as a Service) 
and SaaS (Software as a Service). More on this here: &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/what-is-cloud-computing&quot;&gt;What Cloud Computing Really Is&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

This is a scalable service provided by a vendor, designed to be 
easier to setup and administer with less cost, in addition to reducing 
waste from lesser used data center resources. &lt;br /&gt;

The idea is to eliminate physical location from the data and system 
access equation. Data from several corporate or individual clients are 
segmented but do share server space — called, co-location. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Public Cloud&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-23573&quot; height=&quot;400&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/04/public-cloud.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Public Cloud&quot; width=&quot;400&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The private cloud describes an internal computing model and 
architecture which provides hosted services similar to those of the 
public cloud, but reserved for corporate users and those that are 
approved; essentially, a private cloud is not open to the public and us 
usually setup behind a firewall. In a sense, this turns the IT 
department into the service provider or vendor for cloud resources. For 
those interested in reaping the benefits of virtualized cloud 
architecture, yet needing more control and security, this is a popular 
option.&lt;br /&gt;

Virtualization and data center automation allows for the scalability,
 maximizing hardware usage, and flexibility to support internal 
corporate clients. And, if your organization is so inclined, metering 
also allows you to charge departments based on their usage. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Private Cloud&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-23574&quot; height=&quot;400&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/04/private-cloud.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Private Cloud&quot; width=&quot;400&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Top 5 Things to Look for In A Cloud Computing Provider&lt;/h3&gt;
For many organizations, the benefits of the public cloud outweigh the
 risks. But before making a decision on shifting an application or 
service to the cloud, there are a few things to consider. The first 
question is whether or not the intended application is suitable for use 
in a cloud-based setting. &lt;br /&gt;

Assuming your application has been deemed a good candidate for the 
cloud, the second consideration is who to trust with your data. &lt;br /&gt;

So here are the top 5 things you should consider when selecting a public cloud vendor. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
 #1 Is the company viable?&lt;/h3&gt;
Before handing over your critical applications and data, an important
 first step is to assess the financial viability of the company. Find 
out how long the company has been in business. Given the relative 
immaturity of this market, it may be unlikely to find vendors with 
several decades of presence, but you almost certainly don’t want a 
company that has just set up shop either. In addition, look for any 
indicators of past or future economic issues, along with frequent 
leadership changes.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
 #2 Are service level agreements offered?&lt;/h3&gt;
For organizations entrusting mission critical data to a vendor, 
you’ll want to ensure that your systems will not suffer from frequent or
 extended outage periods. Downtime can have disastrous consequences both
 in terms of financial loss and damage to company reputation. For this 
reason, a service level agreement with negotiable terms, should be 
available. This agreement should outline provisions for everything from 
server or software issues, to more detailed disaster recovery plans. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
 #3 Is customer service a priority? &lt;/h3&gt;
One guarantee with corporate networks is that something often can and
 will go wrong. In these instances, it is imperative that the vendor 
respond quickly, efficiently, and professionally. You should determine 
things like: response times, dedicated vs. general support, and 
phone/email/chat availability. Depending on the nature of the 
application that the vendor hosts, you may find that a dedicated support
 engineer, with 24×7 availability better suits your needs than calling a
 general help line and waiting in a call queue. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
 #4 Will my customers have the same level of performance?&lt;/h3&gt;
Another issue cited with cloud services is the perceived negative 
performance impact. Customers and employees have an expectation that no 
matter where data is housed, they will enjoy the same level of 
performance. The cloud provider should be able to define how they 
measure performance and be able to provide real-time and ongoing 
measurements and statistics to back this up. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
 #5 How is security handled?&lt;/h3&gt;
Perhaps the most frequent reason cited for not pursuing cloud 
computing is security. Many organizations have invested considerable 
financial and human resources in order to secure their network 
environments and the thought of abandoning that level of control and 
comfort to an unknown entity can seem like an unnecessary gamble. Any 
reputable vendor should be able to outline their security practices and 
modify them based on your requirements, particularly as it relates to 
any industry-specific regulatory requirements you have. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Summary&lt;/h3&gt;
The decision to pursue cloud computing is one that many organization 
have or will make as this technology grows and matures. But this 
decision need not be one fraught with uncertainty. With a little due 
diligence, and answering a few key questions, you can ensure that your 
cloud vendor selection is a sound one. &lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6996589776438556714/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cloud-computing-101-private-vs-public.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6996589776438556714'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6996589776438556714'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cloud-computing-101-private-vs-public.html' title='Cloud Computing 101: Private vs Public Cloud'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-1447436312285897949</id><published>2012-09-04T02:46:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:46:31.200-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Choosing Between Private and Public Cloud Computing</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Are there advantages to having a private cloud network operated 
within a company’s own infrastructure  over having a public cloud? 
Should smaller companies outsource their servers and information to 
external public cloud networks like Microsoft’s Azure or Amazon’s Web 
Services? The difference between &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/private-vs-public-cloud&quot; title=&quot;Cloud Computing 101: Private vs Public Cloud&quot;&gt;public and private cloud computing&lt;/a&gt;
 can be summarized by looking at where the infrastructure or data is 
being hosted — is it within a company’s own firewall or outside of it? 
However, the question related to what should a company choose to rely on
 for its own network and infrastructure is much more complex.&lt;br /&gt;

 Let’s first take a look at the three main service modules as they relate to cloud computing:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
SaaS&lt;/h2&gt;
Software as a service may refer to something like Google Docs or &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/onlive-desktop&quot; title=&quot;OnLive Desktop&quot;&gt;Microsoft Office 365&lt;/a&gt;
 which allow you to access productivity suites through the cloud. The 
advantages are numerous. For example, the cost of this sort of software 
is generally based on the pay-as-you-go model and this eliminates huge 
upfront expenses. You don’t have to purchase an entire suite from 
Microsoft, but instead you can pay a monthly fee for the privilege of 
having your employees use it. It is also flexible in terms of how many 
employees have access to the software and the types of features that can
 be enabled or disabled on demand. In a private cloud, SaaS can also 
exist within the ranks of the employment force. For example, an e-mail 
client who is only accessible to the users within the same firewall 
could fit under private cloud.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
IaaS&lt;/h2&gt;
Infrastructure as a service may reference computers, servers, storage
 units, and the building blocks of a company’s IT section. IaaS may 
refer to virtual machines as well as physical hardware.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
PaaS&lt;/h2&gt;
Platform as a service refers to the layer of software hosting that 
the SaaS sits underneath— and relies on it to function. For example, an 
operating system can be considered a platform. Many PaaS, including 
Amazon’s Elastic Compute Cloud (EC2), offer a wide range of platforms 
and operating systems for companies to choose from or alter — thus 
offering great elasticity and scalability.&lt;br /&gt;

According to &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://aws.amazon.com/ec2/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Amazon’s EC2 description page&quot;&gt;Amazon’s EC2 description page&lt;/a&gt;,
 “Amazon EC2 presents a true virtual computing environment, allowing you
 to use web service interfaces to launch instances with a variety of 
operating systems, load them with your custom application environment, 
manage your network’s access permissions, and run your image using as 
many or few systems as you desire.”&lt;br /&gt;

Now let’s take a look at public and private cloud computing and 
compare their advantages or disadvantages as they relate to companies of
 different sizes and needs.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Public Cloud&lt;/h3&gt;
For SMBs and startups public cloud computing makes all the sense in 
the world. These companies often don’t have much capital and have less 
risk in losing information due to theft or security breaches. For SMBs, 
cloud computing saves them a lot of money and the need to build extra 
infrastructure.&lt;br /&gt;

Smaller businesses and startups really enjoy the pay-as-you-go 
flexibility that public cloud offers and the cost savings associated 
with it. Most service providers, like Amazon with Web Services and EC2, 
offer a lot of scalability so businesses can scale their operations only
 to the needs that they have.&lt;br /&gt;

For example, if a company’s demand grows and more employees get 
hired, the public cloud provider will allow the company to have access 
to more infrastructure as a service and servers hosting the data that 
will be need for the additional employees.&lt;br /&gt;

David Linthicum, CTO and founder of cloud computing consolidation 
firm, Blue Mountain labs, emphasized this recently in an interview I 
conducted with him for another story. He said that a company’s workforce
 should never see a server and should only bring on-site computing 
devices like laptops to their workplace. The actual infrastructure 
should be in a public cloud and any computing device — be it a laptop, 
tablet, or tower PC — should be able to access it.&lt;br /&gt;

However, questions arise when you talk about bigger companies or ones
 with a lot of sensitive data to keep track of. Should they rely on a 
public cloud option or host their own private cloud?&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Private Cloud&lt;/h3&gt;
Private cloud makes a lot of sense to these bigger companies because 
it is based on a model where they run their own servers and 
infrastructure. The idea is to control your own infrastructure and only 
allow workers within the same firewall to access all the content from 
the cloud.&lt;br /&gt;

Whether or not your company is sharing a network with users outside 
your firewall  is a key part that separates public cloud from private 
cloud. This may or may not mean the servers are on-site, but 
connectivity is probably done through a VPN connection and there are a 
lot of encryptions that keep anyone else from accessing the network. 
Public clouds also have a lot of security, but your company is sharing 
software, computing or infrastructure with other companies using the 
same network.&lt;br /&gt;

Another key aspect of private cloud is that management is done within
 the organization itself. This means that if something goes haywire the 
company has someone to blame within its own ranks rather than has to 
rely on the provider of the cloud service to fix the issue.&lt;br /&gt;

The private cloud platform can also scale on demand, to the degree to
 which the company can purchase equipment on a whim. It still makes 
sense from a financial perspective for any company instead of not using a
 cloud at all and purchasing all software and hardware upfront.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Hybrid Cloud&lt;/h3&gt;
There is also another category called the hybrid cloud. This is a &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/videos/what-is-cloud-computing&quot; title=&quot;What is Cloud Computing&quot;&gt;form of cloud computing&lt;/a&gt;
 where a company may manage its own infrastructure and thus rely on 
private cloud for IaaS, but at the same time allow this infrastructure 
to go outside the firewall for other cloud computing tasks such as SaaS.
 This model has aspects of both private and public cloud in different 
areas of the company’s operations. Another example of the hybrid cloud, 
as outlined by &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://searchcloudcomputing.techtarget.com/definition/hybrid-cloud&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - SearchCloudComputing&quot;&gt;SearchCloudComputing&lt;/a&gt;,
 is if a company uses Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), which 
is a public cloud service to store archival data, while it relies on 
in-house storage infrastructure for customer data being used on a daily 
basis.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Conclusion&lt;/h3&gt;
Cloud computing is much more complex and varied than meets the eye at
 first. The idea isn’t just based on an on demand network with freedom 
of infrastructure accessibility. There are also both self-hosted private
 cloud networks running within companies’ own ranks, and companies like 
Amazon that are embracing the cloud for the public enterprise market. It
 will be a very interesting in the next couple of years to see how 
bigger companies embrace the public cloud. They are the most reluctant 
to make the switch due to the fear of loss of control, security, 
outages, being tied down to an external network, and other things that 
these enterprises have to consider when choosing an infrastructure. 
Cloud computing, both public and private, however will continue to 
evolve and offer more options for both smaller companies and large 
enterprises.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/1447436312285897949/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/choosing-between-private-and-public.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1447436312285897949'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1447436312285897949'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/choosing-between-private-and-public.html' title='Choosing Between Private and Public Cloud Computing'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6178849086546851729</id><published>2012-09-04T02:44:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:44:54.497-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Guide to Installing and Setting up Linux — The Easy Way</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
So you want to try Linux but don’t know how. Well, it’s actually 
pretty simple and you have a few options before deciding to fully commit
 to a Linux based operating system.&lt;br /&gt;

The first thing you need to ask yourself is which Linux distro do you
 want? I recently read an article on Digg about the top 35 Linux ditros 
out there.&lt;br /&gt;

Don’t worry, I won’t bombard you with all the different choices you 
have, but the three that you should consider are Ubuntu, Mandriva, and 
OpenSuse.&lt;br /&gt;

I like OpenSuse and Mandriva because of the interface, usability, and
 because it just looks really cool right off the bat. Ubunto is also a 
great  option and the ease of installation makes it a great choice for 
any Windows user to try out.&lt;br /&gt;

There are a few things that I am going to address in this article:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;I’ll talk about how to use the Live CD so that you can try out Linux without actually installing it &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;I’ll also discuss how to do a complete install for those of you who 
have given up on Windows completely … hey, I don’t blame you, I 
sympathize &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;I will also address another option for those of you who still want 
to be able to use Windows every now and again while also having Linux &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
Downloading Ubuntu Linux&lt;/h3&gt;
The first thing you want to do is go to &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.ubuntu.com/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - www.Ubuntu.com&quot;&gt;www.Ubuntu.com&lt;/a&gt; and determine how you want to receive your free copy of Ubuntu.&lt;br /&gt;

Your options are to either download directly or request a copy 
through mail.  Both options are free but remember, a copy through the 
mail can take up to 10 weeks. The quick option is to just download it.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/1.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 1&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3804&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/1.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 1&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You have a few options with the download.  The default is the one you
 will probably want to stick with but you have choices like a 32 bit 
version of Ubuntu or a 64 bit. Unless you know your graphics card can 
handle 64 bit graphics I wouldn’t change/or worry about this selection 
and just stick to 32 bit.&lt;br /&gt;

Next you’ll have to select your location. I would just pick whichever
 location is closest to you and click download. The download will vary 
depending on your Internet speed but 30-45 min is a good estimate.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Getting Your ISO onto a CD&lt;/h3&gt;
You’ve downloaded Ubuntu  … Now what?&lt;br /&gt;

Well what you’ve downloaded was an ISO image.  An ISO image is an 
image of a CD/DVD, so what you need to do is get that ISO image onto a 
CD. There are a few ways to go about this.&lt;br /&gt;

If you have a CD burner on your computer then you probably have software as well. Something like &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.nero.com/enu/index.html&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Nero&quot;&gt;Nero&lt;/a&gt; or &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.roxio.com/enu/products/toast/titanium/overview.html&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Toast Titanium&quot;&gt;Toast Titanium&lt;/a&gt; will work.&lt;br /&gt;

If you don’t have burning software then what you can do is go to &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://cdburnerxp.se/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - CDBurnerXP&quot;&gt;CDBurnerXP&lt;/a&gt;
 and download burning software on XP. Follow the steps (each software 
will be a little different) and ultimately you should see an ISO/burn 
image option.&lt;br /&gt;

Once you have your copy of Ubuntu on a disk it’s time to get the party started!&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Try Out The Live CD&lt;/h3&gt;
With your computer running, go ahead and throw in you copy of Ubunto.
 A menu will automatically appear with all the options you need — the 
first being &lt;strong&gt;Demo and Full Install&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/2.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 2&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3813&quot; height=&quot;404&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/2.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 2&quot; width=&quot;520&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

If you want to demo Ububtu, you will have to restart your computer 
with the CD in the tray. This is also the best way to install Ubuntu 
because you have that option in the Demo as well. When your computer 
reboots it should automatically come up with the Ubuntu menu (pictured 
below).  From there you can go and try Ubuntu without any changes.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/3.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 3&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3814&quot; height=&quot;449&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/3.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 3&quot; width=&quot;600&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Ubuntu will come up and from here you can go ahead and start surfing around.&lt;br /&gt;

Do you see the &lt;strong&gt;Install&lt;/strong&gt; icon your desktop?  Good! Go ahead and click on that — it’s time to start the install.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Installing Linux Ubuntu&lt;/h3&gt;
The next question you have to ask yourself is: In or out?&lt;br /&gt;

You’ve probably determined by now whether you want to install Ubuntu 
exclusively on your computer or if you want to install it while keeping 
Windows. If you haven’t you don’t have much time — make your snap 
decision now!&lt;br /&gt;

The first thing that will come up will be &lt;strong&gt;Language preference&lt;/strong&gt;.  Make your selection and click forward.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/4.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 4&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3815&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/4.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 4&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Next you will have &lt;strong&gt;Time Zone&lt;/strong&gt; selection followed by your &lt;strong&gt;keyboard&lt;/strong&gt; selection.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/5.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 5&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3816&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/5.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 5&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Pretty simple so far, right?&lt;br /&gt;

Your next option will be about &lt;strong&gt;Partitioning&lt;/strong&gt; and there are two options you want to worry about.&lt;br /&gt;

Basically, do you want to do a full install of Ubuntu (Guided – use 
entire disk) or if you have a spare hard drive you will have that option
 under Guided (just make sure you select the right drive!)&lt;br /&gt;

You also have the option to partition your single drive and Ubuntu 
makes it really easy to use. There is an arrow tool in the middle that 
you can click and drag and decide for yourself.  Just make sure Ubuntu 
gets at least 10 GB of space; I selected 50/50.  Windows will have 50% 
of the drive and so will Ubuntu.&lt;br /&gt;

Once you decide click on the forward button and continue.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/6.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 6&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3818&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/6.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 6&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Next you will need to enter a name and password for the computer.  Almost done!&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/7.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 7&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3819&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/7.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 7&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You also have the option to import some of the documents and settings from your Windows accounts.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/8.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 8&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3821&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/8.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 8&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The last step is just a review of the installation. If everything looks kosher you can go ahead and click forward.&lt;br /&gt;

Note that the installation process will start after this. Go ahead and take a break as the install will take about 30 minutes.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/9.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 9&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3822&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/9.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux — The Easy Way - 9&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
All Done!&lt;/h3&gt;
Now that wasn’t so bad was it?  The install will include everything 
you need to start using Ubuntu right away (internet, Openoffice.org, 
etc.).&lt;br /&gt;

If you did a complete install your computer will go right into Ubuntu
 once it reboots. If you installed it alongside Windows, you will be 
prompted to a selection menu every time your computer starts — you will 
have to select Windows or Ubuntu.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Don’t Forget To Update&lt;/h3&gt;
If you have a wired connection then you are good to go and you can start surfing away.&lt;br /&gt;

One thing you will want to do is to get some updates. There is a 
button on the top right corner that will update everything for you. It’s
 quick and painless and will benefit you for obvious reasons.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/10.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux -- The Easy Way - 10&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3824&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/10.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux -- The Easy Way - 10&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/11.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux -- The Easy Way - 11&quot; class=&quot;alignnone size-full wp-image-3825&quot; height=&quot;600&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2009/02/11.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Guide to Setting up Linux -- The Easy Way - 11&quot; width=&quot;467&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

That’s all folks and remember there is a ton of Linux distros out 
there.  Not all installs are the same but some are similar in 
installation, so check them out and make sure you find the right one for
 you.&lt;br /&gt;

Good Luck &amp;amp; Godspeed!&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6178849086546851729/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/guide-to-installing-and-setting-up.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6178849086546851729'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6178849086546851729'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/guide-to-installing-and-setting-up.html' title='Guide to Installing and Setting up Linux — The Easy Way'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2384131684610206912</id><published>2012-09-04T02:43:00.004-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:43:37.423-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
One of the joys of being a Linux user is the flexibility. Virtually 
every aspect of your system is customizable. Testing and tweaking 
desktop managers, compiling a new kernel, fearlessly contributing 
through trial and error, to the open source movement.  Yet, all this 
flexibility is not without its perils.&lt;br /&gt;

It’s happened to us all at some point. We’ve tinkered ourselves into a
 technical abyss rife with grub errors, system freezes, or black screens
 of death-our systems fried. When all attempts at recovery fail, we 
sigh, break out our LiveCD and reinstall. While devastating, the pain 
can become compounded if you have not properly backed up the data 
residing in your /home directory.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Advantages of a Separate Home Partition&lt;/h3&gt;
The general consensus among Linux enthusiasts is that the /home 
directory should be placed on its own partition. There have even been 
proposals that this be made a part of the default installation process.&lt;br /&gt;

The separation accomplishes two things: facilitates cleaner, simpler 
Linux upgrades and provides a safe haven for your data in the event of a
 problem with your primary Linux partition. As a side benefit, if you 
run multiple Linux flavors (i.e. Fedora, openSUSE, Mint, etc.), you’ll 
be able to use the same /home partition for each of these.&lt;br /&gt;

Ubuntu Linux operates on a 6 month release cycle. Clicking the 
upgrade button in the synaptic package manager will upgrade your 
distribution – albeit, with varied results. Some upgrades work 
flawlessly, while others are plagued with problems. Consequently, many 
agree that a clean install is the preferred option.&lt;br /&gt;

A clean install does exactly what the name implies, wiping the hard 
drive during the installation process. One can easily back up their data
 and then restore it, but this step can be eliminated if /home is on a 
separate partition.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-9513&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Creating a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu&lt;/h3&gt;
Convinced? Wondering how to make the change on your existing Ubuntu 
installation? Great! Without further ado, we’ll walk through the simple 
steps to repartition your drive, moving your /home directory to its own 
partition.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;It is important to note, that while these steps 
(or the many variations on them) have been successfully performed many 
times over, the potential for data loss exists.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;
&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;strong&gt;It is imperative that you backup your data before 
you begin. You can use an external drive, online storage systems like 
Ubuntu One or Dropbox or whatever solution you choose. But I can’t 
stress the importance of this step enough.&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Assuming you’ve backed up your data, you’ll need to boot from your 
LiveCD. Why? Basically, because you can’t alter a partition if it’s 
mounted. So, after booting, select your language, and then select: &lt;strong&gt;try Ubuntu without installing&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;There are several partition managers available, but for this 
tutorial, we’re going to be using the Gparted partition manager. From 
the application menu, click on:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;System &amp;gt; Administration &amp;gt; Gparted &lt;/strong&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img1-app.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-9515&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img1-app.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;When Gparted loads, you’ll see a graphical depiction of all the 
partitions on your hard drive. You’ll need to decide which partition you
 want to resize to create space for &lt;strong&gt;/home&lt;/strong&gt;.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img2-partitions.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-9518&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img2-partitions.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Right click the partition you choose and click, &lt;strong&gt;Resize/Move&lt;/strong&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img3-select.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-9519&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img3-select.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;As most important data is stored at the beginning, or the left side 
of the partition, I suggest you resize from the right side. In terms of 
size, needs vary depending on the user, but allocate as much room as you
 can for &lt;strong&gt;/home&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Use your mouse and drag left, to resize the partition and then click, &lt;strong&gt;Resize/Move&lt;/strong&gt;.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img4-resize.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-9520&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img4-resize.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;You should now have a space called unallocated. This will be the 
home of your new partition. Select this space with your mouse and click 
on &lt;strong&gt;Partition &amp;gt; New&lt;/strong&gt; from the menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now select the &lt;strong&gt;filesystem&lt;/strong&gt; you want, ideally, this should match your existing file system , ext3 or  ext4.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*make note of your partition names, we’ll need these later.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img5-new.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-9521&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/img5-new.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;Apply&lt;/strong&gt; twice. &lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Click &lt;strong&gt;Close&lt;/strong&gt;, then &lt;strong&gt;Quit&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Now we’ll need to tell Ubuntu how to use the new partition. Open up a terminal and type the following commands:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To mount the new partition, (for this example, assuming partitions sda1 and sda2 and file  system ext3, yours may be different):
&lt;blockquote&gt;
                sudo mkdir /old&lt;br /&gt;
  sudo mount -t ext3 /dev/sda1 /old&lt;br /&gt;
  sudo mkdir /new&lt;br /&gt;
  sudo mount -t ext3 /dev/sda2 /new
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Now backup the old /home and move to the new partition:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
                cd /old/home&lt;br /&gt;
                find . -depth -print0 | cpio –null –sparse -pvd /new/&lt;br /&gt;
                sudo mv /old/home /old/home_backup&lt;br /&gt;
                sudo mkdir /old/home
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Tell Ubuntu to use the new partition as /home:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
               sudo cp /old/etc/fstab /old/etc/fstab_backup&lt;br /&gt;
               gksudo gedit /old/etc/fstab
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
This will open fstab in Gedit, now type the following:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
              /dev/sda2 /home ext3 nodev,nosuid 0 2
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Save the Gedit file, exit and reboot. Viola, you should now be using your new separate /home partition!&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
When Things Go Wrong …&lt;/h3&gt;
Inevitably, things go wrong. What should you do, you ask?&lt;br /&gt;

The &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://ubuntuforums.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Ubuntu forums&quot;&gt;Ubuntu forums&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.irchelp.org/irchelp/chanlist//&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - IRC channel&quot;&gt;IRC channel&lt;/a&gt;
 are an excellent resource. However if you’d like to skip the 
troubleshooting and start over, type these commands to restore things to
 their previous configuration:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo mkdir /recovery&lt;br /&gt;
sudo mount -t ext3 /dev/sda1 /recovery&lt;br /&gt;
sudo cp -R /recovery/home_backup /recovery/home&lt;br /&gt;
sudo cp /recovery/etc/fstab_backup /recovery/etc/fstab
&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Creating a separate /home partition may seem like more trouble than 
it is worth, but in the end, can save you countless hours of exasperated
 troubleshooting on Ubuntu’s next update.&lt;br /&gt;

This isn’t an exercise you should undertake lightly. However, knowing
 your data is safe and sound is a powerful incentive. Still, as hardware
 failure looms ever possible, it is best to develop and stick to a 
consistent backup schedule.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2384131684610206912/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-create-separate-home-partition.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2384131684610206912'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2384131684610206912'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-create-separate-home-partition.html' title='How to Create a Separate Home Partition in Ubuntu Linux'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-5749903876267691424</id><published>2012-09-04T02:41:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:41:45.350-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Install LAMP in Ubuntu 9.10</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
There are many reasons that people make the leap from other operating
 systems to Linux: improved security, embracing open source software, 
adventure. And then there are programmers, who in their search for a 
more stable development platform, are drawn to the other side.&lt;br /&gt;

PHP has become a popular language for web developers. It’s powerful and easy to learn.&lt;br /&gt;

If you would like to set up a web development environment on your 
computer away from the prying eyes lurking on the Internet, in just a 
few steps, you can have PHP installed on your Ubuntu system.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;lamp&quot; class=&quot;alignright size-full wp-image-10518&quot; height=&quot;114&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/lamp.jpg&quot; title=&quot;lamp&quot; width=&quot;241&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
What is LAMP?&lt;/h3&gt;
LAMP (Linux, Apache, MySQL and PHP) is an open source Web development platform.&lt;br /&gt;

Linux is the operating system, Apache is the web server, MySQL is the database management system and PHP is the language.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-10331&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
PHP vs. Python&lt;/h3&gt;
PHP was designed primarily as a language for web design. Some of the 
benefits are its easy integration with HTML, the tons of free scripts 
available for reuse, and its low learning curve.&lt;br /&gt;

And then there are the new frameworks like, &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://cakephp.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - CakePHP&quot;&gt;CakePHP&lt;/a&gt; and &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://codeigniter.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - CodeIgniter&quot;&gt;CodeIgniter&lt;/a&gt;
 that are designed to aid in rapid development. Opponents though, will 
point out its inconsistent naming conventions, excessive built-in 
functions and lazy syntax.&lt;br /&gt;

Enter &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.python.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Python&quot;&gt;Python&lt;/a&gt;.
 The new kid on the block is rapidly gaining popularity. It is a bit 
more difficult to setup, but proponents rave about its clean, elegant 
syntax and large standard library. Its a more general programming 
language, not specially for web design and uses the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.djangoproject.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Django&quot;&gt;Django&lt;/a&gt; framework.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
LAMP Installation&lt;/h3&gt;
As is often the case, there are a couple ways to install the LAMP environment.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Command Line:&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo apt-get install php5 mysql-server apache2&lt;/blockquote&gt;
or&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo  tasksel&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/tasksel1.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Install LAMP in Ubuntu 9.10&quot; class=&quot;alignright size-full wp-image-10332&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/tasksel1.png&quot; title=&quot;Install LAMP in Ubuntu 9.10&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Press the space bar to select LAMP server. As a lesson from a rather 
painful personal experience, I implore you to make sure none of the 
other options are accidentally selected before you proceed.&lt;br /&gt;

During the installation, you’ll be asked to enter your MySQL root 
password. Ensure you use a secure password, including numbers and 
letters, special characters and remember it — recovery of a lost 
password is no picnic.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
LAMP Installation Checks and Balances&lt;/h3&gt;
Next, let’s make sure everything is installed properly.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Apache&lt;/h5&gt;
In your browser’s address bar, enter this address: &lt;strong&gt;http://localhost&lt;/strong&gt;.  You should see the words, “It Works!” in your browser window:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/works.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;It Works!&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10575&quot; height=&quot;180&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/works.png&quot; title=&quot;It Works!&quot; width=&quot;627&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • PHP&lt;/h5&gt;
Apache is up and running, so we’ll check PHP next. You’ll need to create a file in &lt;strong&gt;/var/www&lt;/strong&gt; called &lt;strong&gt;testing.php&lt;/strong&gt;. Open a terminal and enter:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo /var/www/testing.php&lt;br /&gt;
restart apache – sudo /etc/init.d/apache2 restart&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Now go back to your web browser and enter this address &lt;strong&gt;http://localhost/testing.php/&lt;/strong&gt;. You should see a page displaying version information for your php installation.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/php.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;PHP Installation&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10576&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/php.png&quot; title=&quot;PHP Installation&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Configuring MySQL&lt;/h3&gt;
In order to use MySQL under the LAMP environment, we need to bind the MySQL database to the localhost IP address – &lt;strong&gt;127.0.0.1&lt;/strong&gt;. You can verify it with this terminal command:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
cat /etc/hosts | grep localhost&lt;br /&gt;
cat /etc/mysql/my.cnf | grep bind-address&lt;/blockquote&gt;
You should see 127.0.0.1&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
Optional Install – PHP MyAdmin&lt;/h5&gt;
If you feel comfortable administering a MySQL database directly, you 
won’t need to install  phpMyAdmin, but I think it makes things easier. 
You can install phpMyAdmin from the command line. Fire up a terminal 
windows and type:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo apt-get install libapache2-mod-auth-mysql phpmyadmin&lt;br /&gt;
select apache2, hit enter, enter MySQL root password from earlier step, 
create phpMyAdmin password – you can use the same as your MySQL root 
password&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Open your web browser and enter the address &lt;strong&gt;http://localhost/phpmyadmin/&lt;/strong&gt;. You should see a page like this:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/phpmyadmin.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;phpMyAdmin&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10577&quot; height=&quot;465&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/phpmyadmin.png&quot; title=&quot;phpMyAdmin&quot; width=&quot;570&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
PHP Editors&lt;/h3&gt;
Developers often feel as strong about their editors as they do about 
the languages they favor. The best way to decide on an editor is to 
install a few, try them and pick which works best for you. Here are some
 of the top contenders:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.waterproof.fr/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - PHPEdit&quot;&gt;PHPEdit&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
PHPEdit is an Integrated Development Environment (IDE) for PHP. It 
has advanced PHP tools, a powerful debugger and real-time syntax 
checking.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out PHPEdit &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.waterproof.fr/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://bluefish.openoffice.nl/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Bluefish&quot;&gt;Bluefish&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
Bluefish is my one of the editors I use most. It is used not only for
 PHP, but a number of other languages. It’s open source, has SFTP 
support and code highlighting among other benefits.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out Bluefish &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://bluefish.openoffice.nl/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/emacs.html&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - GNU Emacs&quot;&gt;GNU Emacs&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
GNU Emacs is also an editor for a variety of file types. It has a 
large extension library including a project planner, mail and news 
reader, debugger and calendar.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out GNU Emacs &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.gnu.org/software/emacs/emacs.html&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.jedit.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - jEdit&quot;&gt;jEdit&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
jEdit is one that I tried and set aside quickly, but your experience 
may be different. It has hundreds of plugins that help extend the 
editor’s functionality and is a very mature product.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out jEdit &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.jedit.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://netbeans.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Netbeans&quot;&gt;Netbeans&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
NetBeans is an open source IDE built in Java. It supports several languages in addition to PHP, including C, C++ and JavaScript.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out NetBeans &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://netbeans.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.vim.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Vim&quot;&gt;Vim&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/h5&gt;
Vim is an advanced text editor, based on the still widely used Vi 
Unix editor, along with a more complete feature set. Check it out here.&lt;br /&gt;

You can check out Vim &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.vim.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Programming in Ubuntu&lt;/h3&gt;
For those new to PHP, there are a plenty of resources online to help you get up to speed. I recommend you start at the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.php.net/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - PHP main website&quot;&gt;PHP main website&lt;/a&gt;, then move on to Sitepoint’s &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.sitepoint.com/forums/forumdisplay.php?f=34&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - PHP Forum&quot;&gt;PHP Forum&lt;/a&gt; and w3 Schools &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.w3schools.com/php/default.asp&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - PHP tutorial&quot;&gt;PHP tutorial&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

Happy coding.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/5749903876267691424/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-lamp-in-ubuntu-910.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/5749903876267691424'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/5749903876267691424'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-lamp-in-ubuntu-910.html' title='How to Install LAMP in Ubuntu 9.10'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-3039115059890633053</id><published>2012-09-04T02:37:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:37:31.251-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Install Sun VirtualBox and Widows 7 in Ubuntu 9.10</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
For many of us, the decision to transition from Windows to Linux (or 
Mac to Linux) was a thoughtful, decidedly analytical process. For others
 — those that lean toward a more adventurous approach at new technology 
adoption, perhaps the decision was easier.&lt;br /&gt;

But one challenge that both camps share is evaluating whether or not 
all their software will work under the new operating system.&lt;br /&gt;

From my perspective, the only obstacle was being able to access and 
sync my iPod Touch, as Apple’s iTunes software does not run under Linux.
 There are several equally capable open source music library managers 
under Linux (I’m in the Banshee camp), but even with all the tweaks and 
tricks posted online, my iPod Touch remained stubbornly mute.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
The Solution: Virtualization&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.virtualbox.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot;&gt;&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;How to Install Sun VirtualBox and Widows 7 in Ubuntu 9.10&quot; class=&quot;alignright size-full wp-image-10678&quot; height=&quot;93&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/vb.jpg&quot; style=&quot;padding-left: 15px;&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Sun VirtualBox and Widows 7 in Ubuntu 9.10&quot; width=&quot;321&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;I decided not to trash my music player, and instead researched and installed what’s called virtualization software.&lt;br /&gt;

This software allows a single computer, called a host, to create and 
run virtual environments, called guests. This allows you to run multiple
 operating systems on a single computer without disturbing your current 
setup.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Virtualization Software Options&lt;/h3&gt;
There are a number of different virtualization tools available for 
Linux. Two of the most popular are VMware and Sun’s VirtualBox. The most
 immediate difference between the two is price — VMware is $189, while 
VirtualBox is free. Though I haven’t tested VMware, it seems that many 
also consider it more difficult to configure.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-10073&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
VirtualBox comes in two flavors: VirtualBox Enterprise and Virtualbox Open Source Edition (OSE).&lt;br /&gt;

The closed source software includes binaries and source code available from Sun’s &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - download page&quot;&gt;download page&lt;/a&gt;.
 This version is free only for personal use or evaluation. In order to 
help generate revenue, licenses and technical support for the enterprise
 version of the software are available for $50 per license at Sun’s &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://globalspecials.sun.com/store/globalss/en_US/pd/productID.165871500&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Web Store&quot;&gt;Web Store&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

VirtualBox-ose is available for free in the Ubuntu repositories or from Sun’s &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - download page&quot;&gt;download page&lt;/a&gt;.
 It is released under GPL and the complete source code is also 
available. There are just a few differences between the enterprise and 
ose versions. This list can change, but currently includes:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Remote Display Protocol (RDP) Server&lt;/strong&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;This component implements a complete RDP server on top of the 
virtual hardware and allows users to connect to a virtual machine 
remotely using any RDP compatible client.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;USB support&lt;/strong&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;VirtualBox implements a virtual USB controller and supports passing through USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 devices to virtual machines.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;strong&gt;USB over RDP&lt;/strong&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;This is a combination of the RDP server and USB support allowing 
users to make USB devices available to virtual machines running 
remotely.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
VirtualBox Installation Options&lt;/h3&gt;
Command Line:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;LEFT&quot; style=&quot;margin-bottom: 0in; padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
sudo apt-get install virtualbox-ose&lt;/div&gt;
Ubuntu Repositories:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;LEFT&quot; style=&quot;margin-bottom: 0in; padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
System, Preferences, Synaptic Package Manager – virtualbox-ose, click apply&lt;/div&gt;
Sun Website:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;LEFT&quot; style=&quot;margin-bottom: 0in; padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads&quot;&gt;http://www.virtualbox.org/wiki/Downloads&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Installing Windows 7 in VirtualBox in 10 Easy Steps&lt;/h3&gt;
Once you have VirtualBox installed on your system, you can install 
any OS inside the VM. I’m going to show you how to install Windows 7 in 
your VirtualBox:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 1:&lt;/strong&gt; Launch Virtualbox-ose:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;LEFT&quot; style=&quot;margin-bottom: 0in; padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
Applications, Accessories, Virtuabox OSE&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Step 2:&lt;/strong&gt; In the main VirtualBox window, click the &lt;strong&gt;New&lt;/strong&gt; button and then click &lt;strong&gt;Next&lt;/strong&gt; to start the installation wizard.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/new.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - step2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10077&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/new.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - step2&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 3:&lt;/strong&gt; Enter a name for your new virtual machine, 
for example: Windows 7. Choose Microsoft Windows in the Operating System
 box, and Other Windows in the Version box. Click Next.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/win7.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - step 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10078&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/win7.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - step 3&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 4:&lt;/strong&gt; Next enter the amount of memory you want to 
give to the guest OS. My laptop has 4gb of RAM, so I allocated 2gb. The 
idea is to leave enough for your host machine to still function 
properly, but to allocate enough so that Windows will run smoothly. 
Click next.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/ram.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 4&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10079&quot; height=&quot;469&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/ram.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 4&quot; width=&quot;512&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 5:&lt;/strong&gt; Now, to create a virtual hard drive for the new guest operating system, click the New button.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/newvm.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 5&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10080&quot; height=&quot;469&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/newvm.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 5&quot; width=&quot;512&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 6:&lt;/strong&gt; Make sure dynamically expanding storage is selected, then click Next.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/storage.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 6&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10081&quot; height=&quot;447&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/storage.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 6&quot; width=&quot;445&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 7:&lt;/strong&gt; Next, enter the size and location of your virtual hard disk and click Next.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/size.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 7&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10082&quot; height=&quot;447&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/size.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 7&quot; width=&quot;445&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 8:&lt;/strong&gt; Click Finish. Installation is complete. You’ll see the virtual machine we just created listed on the left.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 9:&lt;/strong&gt; Under settings, in the CD/DVD ROM section, 
you can now define where the Windows 7 install CD is located. Assuming 
you have a CD, insert it into your CD/DVD drive and select “Host 
CD/Drive”, defining the drive letter.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/cd.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 9&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10083&quot; height=&quot;470&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/cd.png&quot; title=&quot;How to Install Widows 7 in VirtualBox - Step 9&quot; width=&quot;613&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Step 10:&lt;/strong&gt; Click OK to save and exit settings. Click 
start and the Windows 7 installer will launch. Now you can install 
Windows 7 like you normally would.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Running VirtualBox&lt;/h3&gt;
Easy: highlight your Windows installation and click start.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/startvbox.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Running VirtualBox&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10084&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/startvbox.png&quot; title=&quot;Running VirtualBox&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

I also installed Guest Additions. It isn’t required but it will add 
support for seamless mode, additional display resolutions and copy/paste
 from guest to host. You can do the install yourself from the Device 
menu.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/ge.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Guest Editions&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10085&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/ge.png&quot; title=&quot;Guest Editions&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

One last tip: To run in fullscreen mode, press host key (usually right, control key) + f&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
VirtualBox: Not Just For Windows&lt;/h3&gt;
At the risk of sparking a distro war in the comments section, I’ll 
still say that Ubuntu is probably one of the most recognizable Linux 
distributions. Many newcomers begin with Ubuntu or Linux Mint, but 
inevitably (like me) get the urge to try other distributions. &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://fedoraproject.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Fedora&quot;&gt;Fedora&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.opensuse.org/en/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - OpenSUSE&quot;&gt;OpenSUSE&lt;/a&gt;, &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.gentoo.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Gentoo&quot;&gt;Gentoo&lt;/a&gt;, and &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www2.mandriva.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Mandriva&quot;&gt;Mandriva&lt;/a&gt; are other popular options.&lt;br /&gt;

Take the plunge, download an .iso file or burn a CD, and create a virtual machine to test out other Linux flavors.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/3039115059890633053/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-sun-virtualbox-and.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/3039115059890633053'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/3039115059890633053'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-sun-virtualbox-and.html' title='How to Install Sun VirtualBox and Widows 7 in Ubuntu 9.10'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-1192026377225689098</id><published>2012-09-04T02:36:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:36:31.236-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Install Skype in Ubuntu Linux 9.10</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Prior to the information age, our phone selections were simple. One 
line per family, typically a lone phone, attached to the wall with a 
tangled cord, push-button, or (gasp!) rotary dialing.&lt;br /&gt;

Thankfully, telecommunications have come a long way. With an array of
 mobile and cordless phones, along with an even more confusing number of
 providers, the choices are dizzying.&lt;br /&gt;

The most recent telephony innovation lives on the Internet. Using 
desktop, laptops, and even netbooks, coupled with the right software, 
our computers have become an attractive alternative to traditional phone
 services.&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.skype.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot;&gt;&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;skype&quot; class=&quot;alignright size-full wp-image-10671&quot; height=&quot;83&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/skype.jpg&quot; title=&quot;skype&quot; width=&quot;176&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

In fact, a quick scan of popular news websites will confirm that many
 people are opting to eliminate their land lines in favor of these less 
costly, even free, portable options.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.skype.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Skype&quot;&gt;Skype&lt;/a&gt; has emerged as a leader in this area.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Skype Overview&lt;/h3&gt;
Skype allows you to make regular audio and video calls over the 
Internet using your computer’s microphone and webcam. Video to other 
parts of the world can be spotty, based on the country’s bandwidth 
restrictions, but audio is more consistent. In addition, it has instant 
messaging, file transfer, and SMS features.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-10037&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Calls to other Skype users are free. Calls to other lines are charged a 
per-minute or monthly rates, based on the country. Call forwarding and 
voicemail are available at an additional cost. You simply deposit funds 
into your Skype account, and call charges are deducted from there.&lt;br /&gt;

Pricing details are available &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.skype.com/prices/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.
 Skype is also available as an application on Blackberry and Android 
phones. Now, you can make free calls on these cell phones without using 
any plan minutes.&lt;br /&gt;

Skype uses a decentralized peer-to-peer technology that routes calls 
through distributed servers and other users. Those concerned about 
security should note that all communications are encrypted from end to 
end so there is no danger of someone intercepting and listening in on 
your calls.&lt;br /&gt;

While Skype is free to download, it is proprietary software, not open
 to modification. And for this reason, there are some in the open source
 community that balk at its usage. There are open source versions of 
software like Ekiga (available in the repositories) that allow for audio
 and video calls, as well as instant messaging.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Installing Skype&lt;/h3&gt;
There are two ways to install Skype. You can either download the 
Debian file (.deb), or add it to the Ubuntu software repository. The 
benefit of adding it to the repository, is that you will receive 
automatic updates via synaptic, or apt-get. If you choose to install via
 .deb file, you’ll need to keep abreast of any updates and manually 
download and install new versions from the Skype website when they 
become available.&lt;br /&gt;

Instructions on how to add to the repository are available &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://forum.skype.com/index.php?showtopic=29679&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

Debian file installation was tricky in previous iterations of the 
software. And things like hardware and Linux version still play an 
important part in what your particular experience will be. I’ve run 
Skype under both Karmic Koala (9.10) and its predecessor Jaunty 
Jackalope (9.04), both on HP and Toshiba hardware. In both, instances, 
it’s worked well calling as close as my own neighborhood, and as far 
away as Africa.&lt;br /&gt;

Here are the quick installation steps:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;First, download the appropriate version for your file system type from &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.skype.com/download/skype/linux/choose/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - this link&quot;&gt;this link&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Make note of where you downloaded the .deb file. Double click on the file to launch the installer.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Follow the prompts to install the software.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Using Skype&lt;/h3&gt;
Launch Skype from the menu — Applications, Internet, Skype:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/skype1.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Installing Skype in Ubuntu&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10038&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/skype1.png&quot; title=&quot;Installing Skype in Ubuntu&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Creating an Application Launcher&lt;/h5&gt;
You can always launch Skype from the command line by typing: skype, 
in a terminal window. But if you’d like to add a desktop launcher follow
 these steps:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;first right click on top of the menu and click: Add to panel&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;select custom application launcher&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;type in a name&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;type command: skype&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
** you may also drag the icon from the Application menu to the top panel&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Skype Customization&lt;/h3&gt;
You can customize Skype to suit your preference for things like 
privacy and notification settings. You’ll also be able to tweak and test
 your audio and video settings.&lt;br /&gt;

In the skype window, press ctrl+o or press the small “S” symbol at the bottom of the window.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/skypeoptions.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Skype Options&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10039&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/skypeoptions.png&quot; title=&quot;Skype Options&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

For more information about individual customization settings, visit &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.skype.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - skype.com&quot;&gt;skype.com&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Skype Addons&lt;/h3&gt;
As a writer, I often use Skype to make calls for interviews. There is
 a tool that is very useful to me in writing that others might find 
helpful as well — the Skype Recorder. This program, works with Skype, to
 allow you to record your calls.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Record calls to MP3, Ogg Vorbis or WAV file format&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Automatic and manual recording&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure automatic recording on per-caller basis&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Split stereo recording&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Free, unlimited and open source, released under the GNU GPL&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
In addition to writers, businesses and organizations that would like 
to record company teleconferences would benefit most from this tool. It&amp;nbsp;
 should be noted that recording calls without prior knowledge and 
permission of all participants is illegal in some countries. So, be sure
 to notify you caller if you intend to record the session.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Skype Recorder Installation&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Download the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://atdot.ch/scr/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Skype Recorder&quot;&gt;Skype Recorder&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Double click the file and follow the prompts to install&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Find Skype Recorder under Application, Accessories&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;To use the software, first launch Skype, then launch Skype Recorder.
 An icon will appear on your panel. Start your call in Skype and then 
click record.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/recorder1.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Skype Recorder&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10040&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/02/recorder1.png&quot; title=&quot;Skype Recorder&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Is Skype Right for You?&lt;/h3&gt;
Some users have experienced audio problems with Skype, while others 
have had a nearly flawless experience. But there are alternatives. In 
addition to Ekiga, check out &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.qutecom.org/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - QuteCom&quot;&gt;QuteCom&lt;/a&gt; (formerly WengoPhone) and &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://oovoo.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - ooVoo&quot;&gt;ooVoo&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

In terms of audio recording, Audacity (available in the repos) is a 
popular alternative. Keep in mind also, that Skype cannot be used to 
call for emergency services.&lt;br /&gt;

My suggestion is to install and test each of these, and use what works best for you.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/1192026377225689098/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-skype-in-ubuntu-linux-910.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1192026377225689098'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1192026377225689098'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-install-skype-in-ubuntu-linux-910.html' title='How to Install Skype in Ubuntu Linux 9.10'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-1612224872703392884</id><published>2012-09-04T02:35:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:35:29.771-07:00</updated><title type='text'>How to Set Up Safe FTP in Linux</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) is one of the oldest and most popular 
ways to share files between computers and servers. In terms of the 
Internet, this happens transparently on websites where you download 
software or files. FTP is available both under Windows and Linux.&lt;br /&gt;

FTP by itself isn’t very secure. Information is transmitted in clear 
text, making it subject to interception and theft. Thus, we have more 
secure options, like the Very Secure FTP daemon (vsftpd). In this 
article, we’ll explore how to setup &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://freshmeat.net/projects/vsftpd/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - vsftpd&quot;&gt;vsftpd&lt;/a&gt; under Linux.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;How to Set Up Safe FTP in Linux&quot; class=&quot;size-full wp-image-11637 alignright&quot; height=&quot;180&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/wp-content/uploads/2010/05/penguin.png&quot; style=&quot;padding: 10px;&quot; title=&quot;How to Set Up Safe FTP in Linux&quot; width=&quot;150&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
What is VSFTPD?&lt;/h2&gt;
The vsftp daemon runs in the background and allows you or users you 
designate, to copy files to and from your linux boxes, using username 
and password as login credentials. This ability is open to individuals 
or groups you may want to establish.&lt;br /&gt;

VSFTPD features include:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Virtual IP configurations&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Virtual users&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Standalone or inetd operation&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Powerful per-user configurability&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Bandwidth throttling&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Per-source-IP configurability&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Per-source-IP limits&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;IPv6&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Encryption support through SSL integration&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
How To Install VSFTP&lt;/h2&gt;
The daemon is included in most versions of Linux. If you are using a 
Debian based distribution like Mint or Ubuntu, open a terminal window 
and type: &lt;strong&gt;sudo apt-get install vsftpd&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

If you are using a Red Hat based disto, open a terminal window and type: &lt;strong&gt;sudo yum install vsftp&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
How To Configure VSFTP&lt;/h2&gt;
To configure vsftp, open the vsftpd.conf file in the /etc directory. 
For instance, if you were using gedit as your text editor, you would 
type: &lt;strong&gt;sudo gedit /etc/vsftpd.conf&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

First, for a secure setup, you’ll want to disable anonymous access to your ftp server. Change this line: &lt;strong&gt;anonymous_enable=YES&lt;/strong&gt; to &lt;strong&gt;anonymous_enable=NO&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

With anonymous access disabled, you’ll want to allow local users to log in, by uncommenting the following line: &lt;strong&gt;#local_enable=YES&lt;/strong&gt; to &lt;strong&gt;local_enable=YES&lt;/strong&gt; (simply remove the # sign).&lt;br /&gt;

Allow write access by uncommenting this line: &lt;strong&gt;#write_enable=YES to write_enable=YES&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Save and close the file.&lt;br /&gt;

Setup an FTP user account:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
sudo mkdir -p /home/ftp/ftpuser&lt;br /&gt;
sudo useradd ftpuser -d /home/ftp/ftpuser -s /bin/false&lt;br /&gt;
sudo passwd ftpuser&lt;/div&gt;
Restart your ftp server:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
Debian: sudo etc/init.d/vsftpd restart&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
Red Hat: sudo service vsftpd restart&lt;/div&gt;
Test:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
netstat -a | grep ftp&lt;/div&gt;
Run at the command Line:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
ftp ip address or hostname: ftp 100.00.00.00&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Other VSFTP Configuration Options&lt;/h2&gt;
There are many other options you can add to this file:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Limiting the maximum number of client connections (max_clients)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Limiting the number of connections by source IP address (max_per_ip)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Setting the maximum rate of data transfer per anonymous login (anon_max_rate)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Setting the maximum rate of data transfer per non-anonymous login (local_max_rate)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
VSFTP Considerations and Resources&lt;/h2&gt;
Potential issues are often as simple as username and password entry 
errors. But because firewalls are designed to limit access to certain 
ports, this is a good area to investigate if you experience issues with 
your installation. Be sure to check out the vsftpd &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://vsftpd.beasts.org/vsftpd_conf.html&quot; title=&quot;External Link - html man page&quot;&gt;html man page&lt;/a&gt; for more information.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/1612224872703392884/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-set-up-safe-ftp-in-linux.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1612224872703392884'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/1612224872703392884'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/how-to-set-up-safe-ftp-in-linux.html' title='How to Set Up Safe FTP in Linux'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6268747759369832563</id><published>2012-09-04T02:34:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:34:31.285-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Introduction to Python Programming in Ubuntu Linux</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://python.org/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Python&quot;&gt;Python&lt;/a&gt;
 is one of a handful of modern programming languages gaining a lot of 
traction in the development community.  It was created by Guido von 
Rossum in 1990, named after – you guessed it – the comedy, “Monty 
Python’s Flying Circus”. Like Java, once written, programs can be run on
 any operating system.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Python Programming&quot; class=&quot;alignleft size-full wp-image-12722&quot; height=&quot;71&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/python-logo.gif&quot; title=&quot;Python Programming&quot; width=&quot;211&quot; /&gt;I
 began programming many years ago, and admittedly once I got into 
networking, turned away from my first love. But for those of you who 
would like to begin trying your hand at a new language, Python is 
excellent to start with. Supporters tout its low learning curve and 
elegant coding system.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Python Installation&lt;/h2&gt;
Ubuntu makes starting easy, as it comes with a command line version 
pre-installed. In fact, the Ubuntu community develops many of its 
scripts and tools under Python. You can begin the process with either 
the command line version or the graphical Interactive Development 
Environment (IDLE).&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Python Programming From the Command Line&lt;/h3&gt;
Open a terminal window and type ‘python’ (without the quotes). This opens python in interactive mode.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/pythoncl.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Python Programming&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-12723&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/pythoncl.png&quot; title=&quot;Python Programming&quot; width=&quot;600&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

While this mode is good for initial learning, you may prefer to use a
 text editor (like Gedit, Vim or Emacs) to write your code. As long as 
you save it with the .py extension, it can be executed in the terminal 
window.&lt;br /&gt;

Ready to write your first program? Many a road to programming 
excellence began with the old standby – the Hello World program. So 
that’s where we’ll begin.&lt;br /&gt;

At the prompt, type in print “Hello World!” (with the quotes) and hit enter. You’ll see the command printed on the next line.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/helloworld1.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Python Programming&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-12724&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/helloworld1.png&quot; title=&quot;Python Programming&quot; width=&quot;600&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

To run a script from the command line, type: python my_script.py. To exit the command line, type exit() or hit ctrl+d&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Python Programming with IDLE&lt;/h3&gt;
Can’t imagine writing a long program from the command line? Me 
either. In that case, you can try IDLE. Open a terminal window and type:
 ‘idle’. (without the quotes). You’ll see the python graphical shell 
loaded.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/pythonshell.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Python Programming&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-12725&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/pythonshell.png&quot; title=&quot;Python Programming&quot; width=&quot;600&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

To write a Python script, click on File &amp;gt; New Window. This will 
open a sort of Notepad type editor. Type in the following code:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
#linuxversion.py&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
#Have user input version and print response&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
name = raw_input(“What Linux release do you use?”)&lt;/div&gt;
&lt;div style=&quot;padding-left: 30px;&quot;&gt;
print “I also like”, name, ” – Linux rules!”&lt;/div&gt;
Couple things going on here. The first 2 lines, preceded by the # 
sign are just comments. One of my earliest programming lessons was to 
always comment your work, not only for your own sanity, but for those 
who may need to edit the code after you.  The third statement uses the 
input gathered from the raw_input function and assigns it to a variable,
 name. Finally, the print statement will return the result.&lt;br /&gt;

Save the file, with a .py extension, then click on Run &amp;gt; Run Module from the menu to run the program.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/shellprogram.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Python Programming&quot; class=&quot;alignfull size-medium wp-image-12726&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/06/shellprogram.png&quot; title=&quot;Python Programming&quot; width=&quot;600&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
A Word of Caution&lt;/h2&gt;
Many programming languages typically ignore whitespace – that is the 
spacing in your code. But in Python, improper use of spacing can 
generate syntax errors. As an organization nut of sorts, I can 
appreciate the simplicity and readability of properly aligned code, but 
for some this takes a bit of getting used to.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Python Programming Resources&lt;/h2&gt;
Now that you have Python up and running, you’ll undoubtedly want to 
move to on to a bit more complex programs. One of the best resources is 
the main &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.python.org/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Python website&quot;&gt;Python website&lt;/a&gt;. Here are a few additional recommendations:&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6268747759369832563/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/introduction-to-python-programming-in.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6268747759369832563'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6268747759369832563'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/introduction-to-python-programming-in.html' title='Introduction to Python Programming in Ubuntu Linux'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-8613251529564045469</id><published>2012-09-04T02:33:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:33:16.309-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Linux Commands for Beginners Part 2: Exploring the CLI</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
This article, which continues from &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/linux-commands-for-beginners&quot;&gt;Beginner Linux Administration&lt;/a&gt;, will focus mainly on the command line interface, also known as the CLI. We will explore features using &lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;grep&lt;/strong&gt;, &lt;strong&gt;piping&lt;/strong&gt; and other tools used for generating info, creating files and directories, and a brief introduction to permissions.  &lt;br /&gt;

In general you may be using a GUI to do everything, but using the CLI
 will give you a deeper, more profound understanding of how your Linux 
machine works. You’ll be surprised at how much you can learn about the 
OS as well as where certain files are located, why, how to edit, and 
accessing them quickly and more efficiently.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Using ls&lt;/h3&gt;
Using &lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt; is useful for quickly displaying files and 
directories, who created them, who owns them, and whether I have 
permission to read, write, and execute. You can also use it to quickly 
display a particular file. For example:&lt;br /&gt;

I’ll first start in the root directory (so issue the command &lt;strong&gt;cd /&lt;/strong&gt;) then type the command &lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

All “ls” does is display the files and directories that you are in. 
Not much info as you can see, but there are several different options 
you can use along with “ls” to get the info you are looking for.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 1&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28861&quot; height=&quot;143&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-1.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 1&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Let”s change to the &lt;strong&gt;/etc&lt;/strong&gt; directory and run the &lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt; command: &lt;strong&gt;cd /etc&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You’ll notice when you run “ls” this time you see too many options 
and you can’t read all of them. So what we will do is execute “ls” but 
we will pipe the output of ls to the less command.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;
&lt;dt&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Piping&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/dt&gt;
&lt;dd&gt;&lt;em&gt;Redirects the output of one program into the input of another.  
The symbol is |. The command to the left is sent as input to the command
 to the right of the pipe.&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
Type &lt;strong&gt;ls | less&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28862&quot; height=&quot;204&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-2.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 2&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28863&quot; height=&quot;423&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-3.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 3&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The files are displayed with colons at the bottom. Use the arrow keys
 to scroll up and down. All you have to do is hit the “q” button to get 
out of less.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;
&lt;dt&gt;&lt;strong&gt;Less&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;/dt&gt;
&lt;dd&gt;&lt;em&gt;Less is a program that allows backward and forward movement.  It
 is similar to opening a file in an editor but it doesn’t have to load 
the whole file before viewing which is helpful if you are dealing with 
large log files.&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
You can also just use less to view your files. For example we want to
 view the passwd file so we can quickly view all of the newest users 
added to the system.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;em&gt;[The passwd file stores essential info containing system’s accounts with user and group ID&#39;s, home directory, shell, etc.]&lt;/em&gt; &lt;br /&gt;

Make sure you’re in the /etc directory and type “less passwd.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 4&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28864&quot; height=&quot;428&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-4.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 4&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

If you scroll down to the bottom (or type “G”) you will notice the 
last few users added to the system.  Type “q” to quit less and let’s try
 it with the file called group.&lt;br /&gt;

Type &lt;strong&gt;less group&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 5&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28865&quot; height=&quot;429&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-5.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 5&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Go ahead and scroll around and then type “q” to quit.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 6&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28866&quot; height=&quot;161&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-6.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 6&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Basically, less is just an alternate way to view files and 
directories but it is much more convenient than viewing data then using 
the cat command. We will learn how to edit this data later using vi.&lt;br /&gt;

You can issue the commands “cat passwd” and “cat group” to see the differences. &lt;br /&gt;

Also, there are other keystrokes you can use with less to quickly 
navigate within a document. You can always issue the command “man less” 
for a complete breakdown of what less does, and the other options 
available.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 7&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28867&quot; height=&quot;434&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-7.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 7&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Using ls with Options&lt;/h3&gt;
So, we’ve used “ls” on its own and we’ve used it with a pipe and 
less. Now we’ll use ls to find specific files we are looking for, as 
well as displaying more information associated with said file.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s go back to the root directory, &lt;strong&gt;cd /&lt;/strong&gt; and then type &lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 8&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28868&quot; height=&quot;143&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-8.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 8&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Then type in &lt;strong&gt;ls –l&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 9&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28869&quot; height=&quot;428&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-9.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 9&quot; width=&quot;647&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You’ll notice everything is displayed in long format which now includes info about permissions, group, size, date, and filename.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Permissions&lt;/strong&gt; – drwxr-xr-x&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Directories&lt;/strong&gt; – 2&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;User&lt;/strong&gt; – root&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Group&lt;/strong&gt; – root&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Size&lt;/strong&gt; – 4096&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Date&lt;/strong&gt; – May 5 04:03&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Directory or File&lt;/strong&gt; – bin&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
The permissions break down is in a set of 3 levels.  User, Group, and 
Other. The firsts set of rwx’s is for the user, the second if for the 
group, the third is for everyone else.
&lt;li&gt;Read – you can read the file&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;You can write or make changes&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Execute – you can execute the file&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
We will get into this in more detail and change permissions levels later using the chmod script.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;Directories&lt;/strong&gt; – The amount of directories within the directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;User&lt;/strong&gt; – The user that owns the file&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Group&lt;/strong&gt; – Group assigned to the file or directory&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Size&lt;/strong&gt; – This should be obvious&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Date&lt;/strong&gt; – Date of last modification&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Directory or file&lt;/strong&gt; – Name of the directory or file&lt;br /&gt;

Other options to use with “ls” are: &lt;br /&gt;

-a – Displays all files, even those that are hidden&lt;br /&gt;
-g – Same as l except the owner is not printed&lt;br /&gt;
-r – Reverse order of how files are displayed&lt;br /&gt;
-m – Output is listed across the page&lt;br /&gt;

There are quite a bit of options and you can also use these in combination with each other.&lt;br /&gt;

Such as “ls –lar.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 10&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28870&quot; height=&quot;442&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-10.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 10&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

As well as “ls –lar | less.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 11&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28871&quot; height=&quot;446&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-11.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 11&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

As you can see, the “ls” command is just a simple way of displaying 
output in the command line interface but with the many different 
features associated, you can display the info to how you want it 
presented.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s finish off this lesson with the grep command.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;Grep – is a command that searches for a specific string in a file and prints out matching a match to given strings or words.&lt;/ul&gt;
You can use grep with “ls” to locate a file you need but are unsure of the exact title.&lt;br /&gt;

If I’m in the /etc directory and am looking for a particular host file.&lt;br /&gt;

I will issue the command “ls |grep host.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 12&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28872&quot; height=&quot;294&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-12.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 12&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Then you can use “cat”, “less”, or even an editor like vi to view or alter the specific file you are looking for.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s say you want the information on the user Roman that is in the passwd file. I would issue the command “grep roman passwd.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 13&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28873&quot; height=&quot;302&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-13.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 13&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

As you can see it will just give me the information associated with the search word “roman.”&lt;br /&gt;

If you’re not in the directory of the file you are looking for you 
can always add the directory info in front of the file you are 
searching.&lt;br /&gt;

“grep igby /etc/group” – For user igby (replace with your own)&lt;br /&gt;

or &lt;br /&gt;

“grep roman /etc/passwd”&lt;br /&gt;

or &lt;br /&gt;

“grep roman /etc/hosts”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Exploring the CLI 14&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28874&quot; height=&quot;357&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Exploring-the-CLI-14.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Exploring the CLI 14&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

These are just simple commands that can be used for a multitude of 
purposes, but if you’re new to using the CLI you can play around with 
them and get a little more comfortable using them in different 
directories and your own files that you’ve created.&lt;br /&gt;

Hopefully this article has been informative for you. We will advance 
on the commands we’ve talked about in the next lessons, as well as get 
into the many others that are available.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/8613251529564045469/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-commands-for-beginners-part-2.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/8613251529564045469'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/8613251529564045469'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-commands-for-beginners-part-2.html' title='Linux Commands for Beginners Part 2: Exploring the CLI'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6231529142594703011</id><published>2012-09-04T02:32:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:32:14.720-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Linux Commands for Beginners Part 1: Beginner Linux Administration</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
The goal of this article is to help introduce new users to the basics
 of Linux. After reading this article you will have an understanding of 
how the Linux system is structured, where files and directories are 
located making it easier for you to navigate around, giving you a better
 idea of how your systems works. We’ll then move on to some basic Linux 
navigation, copy, showing your files and directories, etc.&lt;br /&gt;

Whether you’re new to Linux or are looking into getting some type of 
certificate, you’ll need to have some basic knowledge of the Shell, the 
Kernel, the Terminal, and FHS, among others. There’s actually quite a 
bit of other things you’ll need to know, but let’s start with the 
basics. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
The Kernel&lt;/h3&gt;
The Kernel is what controls everything on a system; think of it as 
the heart of Linux. It performs tasks that create and maintain the Linux
 environment. The Kernel receives instructions from the shell and 
engages the appropriate hardware (processors, memory, disks, enforces 
security, etc.). It is a bridge between applications and the actual data
 processing done at the hardware level.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 1&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28849&quot; height=&quot;332&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-1.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 1&quot; width=&quot;439&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
The Shell&lt;/h3&gt;
The shell is the interface between you and Linux. We issue commands 
through the command line interface which is interpreted and passed on to
 the kernel for processing. When we log onto the computer the shell will
 automatically start. It will then monitor the terminal for any 
commands.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28850&quot; height=&quot;345&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-2.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 2&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;em&gt;This is the Terminal (command line interface).&lt;/em&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
There are a number of shells you can use, each differing slightly. 
Most Linux distros use Bourne-Again shell(bash) but support various 
others: Korn Shell, Bourne shell, C shell, etc. For all intensive 
purposes you can just stick with bash but I will show you how to change 
this if you want to. As you advance you can use shells to create scripts
 to automate tasks, making your daily routine all the more easier.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Filesystem Hierarchy Standard&lt;/h3&gt;
Next important aspect is the FHS. Everything in Linux is either a 
file or a directory. The Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FSH) is the way 
that these files and directories are structured. More importantly though
 is how they are structured. Looks intimidating at first glance but when
 you realize that there is a method to this madness, you will find it’s 
so much simpler because everything is organized in the proper place and 
you can find where you want go much easier.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28851&quot; height=&quot;178&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-3.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 3&quot; width=&quot;624&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/&lt;/strong&gt; – The root directory. This is where your directory structure starts. Everything is housed under the root directory.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 4&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28852&quot; height=&quot;129&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-4.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 4&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/bin&lt;/strong&gt; – Essential user command binaries used for 
general operations: Copy, show directory, etc. (ls, cp, and cat – we’ll 
get to these commands soon) &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/boot&lt;/strong&gt; – Static files of the boot loader. Files here are necessary for a Linux system to start (Kernel &amp;amp; GTUB information)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/dev&lt;/strong&gt; – Where the device files are located&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/etc&lt;/strong&gt; – Configuration files for all programs. Things 
like an apache web server, users &amp;amp; groups on your system, or printer
 configuration. Think of this as a control panel for Windows users.  We 
will edit these text files later (These files should remain static and 
text based).&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/home&lt;/strong&gt; – Home directories for all the users to store 
personal files (i.e. /home/roman) –Windows equivalent of Documents &amp;amp;
 Settings. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/lib&lt;/strong&gt; – Essential shared libraries and kernel modules&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/media&lt;/strong&gt; – Mount point for removable media&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/mnt&lt;/strong&gt; – Temporary mounted file systems &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/opt&lt;/strong&gt; — Add on application software packages – (i.e. Program files for windows users)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/sbin&lt;/strong&gt; — Essential system binaries&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/tmp&lt;/strong&gt; – Programs write their temporary files here.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/usr&lt;/strong&gt; – Multi-user utilities &amp;amp; Applications. It 
contains application source codes, documentation, &amp;amp; config files 
they use.  It’s the largest directory on the system.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/var&lt;/strong&gt; – Variable data on a system. Data that will change as the system is running (Log files, backups, cache, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/root&lt;/strong&gt; – Home directory for root&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;/proc&lt;/strong&gt; – Virtual directory containing process information (system memory, hardware configuration, devices mounted, etc.)&lt;br /&gt;

The directories that I would be most concerned starting off are /etc,
 /home, /dev, /mnt. As your skills progress you’ll venture off into 
other areas, but I started out in /etc 95 percent of the time. There are
 directories that extend, but we’ll get those later.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Navigation &amp;amp; Issuing Commands&lt;/h3&gt;
The first thing you want to do is open a terminal. Depending on the 
distribution you are using this may differ but you should find it in 
Utilities. Since you are new to Linux, I recommend downloading a distro 
and trying it Live without having to install. Check out the blog’s &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/tag/linux&quot; title=&quot;Linux on TrainSignal Training&quot;&gt;Linux section&lt;/a&gt; and our &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/top-10-linux-distros&quot; title=&quot;Top 10 Linux Distros&quot;&gt;list of Linux distros&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Let’s start with some basic commands&lt;/h3&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;pwd&lt;/strong&gt; – Print working directory will tell you what directory you are in.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 5&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28853&quot; height=&quot;233&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-5.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 5&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Notice that I used pwd to tell me where I am &amp;amp; I used cd (change directory) to move into another folder.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;cd&lt;/strong&gt; – Change Directory. Can be used with “/” &amp;amp; 
then the folder you want to go to. For example, cd /home/roman will take
 me to the directory that exits for user Roman.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 6&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28854&quot; height=&quot;239&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-6.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 6&quot; width=&quot;634&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;ls&lt;/strong&gt; – Lists files &amp;amp; directories that you are in.&lt;br /&gt;

It may help to use the ls command to list what files and directories 
exist in the directory you are in. It’s vital to know the difference 
between ls &amp;amp; pwd. pwd tells you where are, ls tells you what you 
have to work with.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 7&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28855&quot; height=&quot;195&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-7.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 7&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;whoami&lt;/strong&gt; – Tells you which user is logged in&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 8&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28856&quot; height=&quot;228&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-8.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 8&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You’ll notice I used the su command to change from user roman, to 
root, then to igby, though igby does not exist. I then used “exit” to go
 back to user roman.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;su&lt;/strong&gt; – Substitute user. There are some rules and additional features that we’ll explore on the next lesson. &lt;br /&gt;

Let’s go to your home directory and finish off a few other commands. For me it will be cd /home/roman.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s make a file and delete it.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;touch&lt;/strong&gt; – A command you can use to quickly create a file that you can also “touch” on existing files (We’ll dive into that later)&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 9&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28857&quot; height=&quot;185&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-9.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 9&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You’ll notice that “createfile” wasn’t there before but when I used 
it with the “touch” command it was created. Nothing is in createfile but
  it exists.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;rm&lt;/strong&gt; – Removes the file for you&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Beginner Linux 10&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28858&quot; height=&quot;209&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Beginner-Linux-10.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Beginner Linux 10&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;strong&gt;clear&lt;/strong&gt; – Clears the terminal for you&lt;br /&gt;

Those are some of the basic commands. There are plenty more where 
that came from.  Hopefully this article has been informative and 
insightful. The next article will follow up on this one with more 
information on Linux as well as commands to really get you going.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6231529142594703011/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-commands-for-beginners-part-1.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6231529142594703011'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6231529142594703011'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-commands-for-beginners-part-1.html' title='Linux Commands for Beginners Part 1: Beginner Linux Administration'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-2342485905165835717</id><published>2012-09-04T02:30:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:30:47.846-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Linux File Permissions</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
What we’ll cover in this article is how to identify permissions for 
files &amp;amp; directories and how to change them, as well as changing 
ownerships, groups, etc. Depending on what you want to do, you’ll want 
to make sure you have the appropriate permissions (obviously), so let’s 
find out how to change them.&lt;br /&gt;

Let’s start by making a file we can use.  &lt;br /&gt;

I issued the “touch” command to make a file creatively named testfile.&lt;br /&gt;

Touch will just create an empty file but has all the same attributes as an actual file. You can see this by using “ls –l.”&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;
&lt;dt&gt;Commands:&lt;/dt&gt;
&lt;dd&gt;touch test file&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;mkdir workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 1&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28880&quot; height=&quot;153&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-1.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 1&quot; width=&quot;587&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The permisions are broken into 4 sections.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 2&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28881&quot; height=&quot;197&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-2.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 2&quot; width=&quot;640&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
chmod – adds and removes permissions&lt;/h3&gt;
If you wanted to add or remove permissions to the user, use the 
command “chmod” with a “+” or “–“, along with the r (read), w (write), x
 (execute) attribute followed by the name of the directory or file. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod +rwx “name of the file”&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod –rwx “name of the directory”&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 3&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28882&quot; height=&quot;229&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-3.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 3&quot; width=&quot;587&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod +x testfile  – this would allow me to execute&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod –wx testfile  – this would take out write and executable permissions&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
You’ll notice that this only changes the permissions for the owner of the file, in this case roman.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Changing Permissions for the Group Owners &amp;amp; Others&lt;/h3&gt;
The command is similar to what we did before, but this time you add a “g” for group or “o” for users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod g+w testfile&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod g-wx testfile&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 4&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28883&quot; height=&quot;240&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-4.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 4&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod o+w testfile&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod o-rwx workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 5&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28884&quot; height=&quot;182&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-5.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 5&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Lastly you can change it for everyone:  “u” for users, “g” for group, &amp;amp; “o” for others; uog or a (for all).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod ugo+rwx workfolder – will give read, write, execute to everyone&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod a=r workfolder – will give only read perission for everyone&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
chgrp – changing groups of files &amp;amp; directories&lt;/h3&gt;
Another useful option is to change file permission to the group 
owning the file. Perhaps you create the files, but people on the db2 
team can write/execute as well. We use chgrp for this purpose.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 6&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28885&quot; height=&quot;150&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-6.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 6&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

You can see above that testfile and the work folder belong to the users group.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 7&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28886&quot; height=&quot;180&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-7.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 7&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

By issuing the command – chgrp “name of the group” “name of the file” – you can change this.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chgrp sales testfile&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chgrp sales workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
This give sales control of the file &amp;amp; then I can take away permissions for everyone else. &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;em&gt;Note: The group must exit before you try to assign groups to files and directories.&lt;/em&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
chown – changing ownership&lt;/h3&gt;
Another helpful command is changing ownerships of files and 
directories. The command is “chwon” along with “name of new owner”  
&amp;amp; “name of file.”&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 8&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28887&quot; height=&quot;228&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-8.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 8&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

The files belonged to roman. To give ownership to tom, issue the command:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chown tom testfile&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chown tom workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
We can also combine the group and ownership command by:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 9&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28888&quot; height=&quot;191&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-9.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 9&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chown -R tom:sales /home/roman/tsfiles&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
The above command gives tom the ownership of the directory tsfiles, 
and all files and subfolders.  The -R stands for recursive which is why 
all sub folders and files belong to tom as well. &lt;br /&gt;

As opposed to:  chown tom workfolder&lt;br /&gt;

This command will give ownership to tom but all sub files and 
directories still belong to the original owner. The -R will transfer 
ownership of all sub directories to the new owner.&lt;br /&gt;

As you can see, you have several options when it comes to 
permissions. You have the capability to dictate who can do what &amp;amp; 
the flexibility to limit usability among users. It may be easier to just
 give all permission to everyone but this may end up biting you in the 
end, so choose wisely.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h3&gt;
Permission in numeric mode&lt;/h3&gt;
The above way of changing permissions will work fine but you may also
 need to know how to change permissions in numeric mode. chmod is used 
in much the same way, but instead of r, w, or x you will use numbers 
instead.&lt;br /&gt;

What are the numbers?&lt;br /&gt;
0 = No Permission&lt;br /&gt;
1 = Execute&lt;br /&gt;
2 = Write&lt;br /&gt;
4 = Read&lt;br /&gt;

You basically add up the numbers depending on the level of permission you want to give.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 10&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28889&quot; height=&quot;247&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-10.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 10&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;
&lt;dt&gt;Examples:&lt;/dt&gt;
&lt;dd&gt;chmod 777 workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;Will give read, write, and execute permissions for everyone.&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 11&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28890&quot; height=&quot;153&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-11.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 11&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod 700 workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;Will give read, write, and execute permission for the user, but nothing to everyone else.&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;img alt=&quot;Linux File Permissions 12&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-28891&quot; height=&quot;181&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2011/11/Linux-File-Permissions-12.jpg&quot; title=&quot;Linux File Permissions 12&quot; width=&quot;583&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;&lt;dd&gt;chmod 327 workfolder&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;Will give write and execute (3) permission for the user, w (2) for the group, and read, write, and execute for other users.&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
&lt;dl&gt;
&lt;dt&gt;Permission numbers&lt;/dt&gt;
&lt;dd&gt;0 = —&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;1 = –x&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;2 = -w-&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;3 = -wx&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;4 = r—&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;5 = r-x&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;6 = rw-&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;dd&gt;7 = rwx&lt;/dd&gt;&lt;/dl&gt;
Either variation of changing permissions will work, just remember how to use the numeric values.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/2342485905165835717/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-file-permissions.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2342485905165835717'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/2342485905165835717'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/linux-file-permissions.html' title='Linux File Permissions'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6381406431084110327</id><published>2012-09-04T02:29:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:29:23.627-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Cisco CCNP Security Curriculum Update</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
n February of 2012, Cisco announced updates to their &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/Cisco-CCNP-Training-Package.aspx&quot; title=&quot;CCNP Training Package&quot;&gt;Cisco CCNP&lt;/a&gt;
 certification program. Since the world of networking and system 
security is constantly evolving, Cisco wanted to ensure that the skills 
assessed in the CCNP Security certification provided both candidates and
 prospective employers with the appropriate skills. This &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/new-ccnp-security-certification-exams&quot; title=&quot;Transitioning to the New CCNP Security Exams&quot;&gt;newest iteration of the CCNP Security certification&lt;/a&gt;
 adds additional support for newer features revolving around the ASA 
platform, including support for the newest 8.3 and 8.4 software versions
 and AnyConnect 3.0.
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Securing Networks with Cisco Routers and Switches (SECURE)&lt;/h2&gt;
The SECURE objectives and exam have not been changed with the current
 upgrade of the CCNP Security certification. The following lists shows 
the objectives of the SECURE exam.&lt;br /&gt;

Pre-Production Design&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco IOS technologies to implement HLD&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco products to implement HLD&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco IOS features to implement HLD 2&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Integrate Cisco network security solutions with other security technologies&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create and test initial Cisco IOS configurations for new devices/services&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Complex Operations Support&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Optimize Cisco IOS security infrastructure device performance&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create complex network security rules to meet the security policy requirements&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Optimize security functions, rules, and configuration&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure &amp;amp; verify NAT to dynamically mitigate identified threats to the network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure &amp;amp; verify IOS Zone Based Firewalls including advanced application inspections and URL filtering&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure &amp;amp; verify the IPS features to identify threats and dynamically block them from entering the network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Maintain, update and tune IPS signatures&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure &amp;amp; verify IOS VPN features&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure &amp;amp; verify Layer 2 and Layer 3 security features&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Advanced Troubleshooting&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Advanced Cisco IOS security software configuration fault finding and repairing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Advanced Cisco routers and switches hardware fault finding and repairing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Implementing Cisco Intrusion Prevention System (IPS)&lt;/h2&gt;
The IPS objectives and exam have not been changed with the current 
upgrade of the CCNP Security certification. The following list shows the
 objectives of the IPS exam.&lt;br /&gt;

Pre-Production Design&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco IPS technologies to implement HLD&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco products to implement HLD&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Choose Cisco IPS features to implement HLD&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Integrate Cisco network security solutions with other security technologies&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create and test initial Cisco IPS configurations for new devices/services&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Complex Support Operations&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Optimize Cisco IPS security infrastructure device performance&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Create complex network security rules, to meet the security policy requirements&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure and verify the IPS features to identify threats and dynamically block them from entering the network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Maintain, update and tune IPS signatures&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Use CSM and MARS for IPS management, deployment, and advanced event correlation.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Optimize security functions, rules, and configuration&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Advanced Troubleshooting&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Advanced Cisco IPS security software configuration fault finding and repairing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Advanced Cisco IPS sensor and module hardware fault finding and repairing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Deploying Cisco ASA Firewall Solutions (FIREWALL)&lt;/h2&gt;
When preparing for this article it became obvious that while the 
wording and organization of many of the objectives has changes, much of 
the material that is expected to be known is the same; because of this, 
objectives that are similar between version1 and 2 will be marked as 
such.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &lt;/span&gt;&amp;nbsp;Existed in v1 curriculum&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &lt;/span&gt;&amp;nbsp;Added to the v2 curriculum&lt;br /&gt;

Cisco ASA adaptive security appliance Basic Configurations&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Identify the ASA product family&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA licensing&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Manage the ASA boot process&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA interface settings&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA management features&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA access control features&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement Network Address Translation (NAT) on the ASA&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement ASDM public server feature&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA quality of service (QoS) settings&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA transparent firewall&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA Routing Features&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA static routing&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA dynamic routing&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA Inspection Policy&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA inspections features&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA Advanced Network Protections&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA Botnet traffic filter&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA High Availability&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA Interface redundancy and load sharing features&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA virtualization feature&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA stateful failover&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Deploying Cisco ASA VPN Solutions (VPN)&lt;/h2&gt;
As was stated with the FIREWALL objectives, the same is true of the VPN objectives.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &lt;/span&gt;&amp;nbsp;Existed in v1 curriculum&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp;&amp;nbsp; &lt;/span&gt;&amp;nbsp;Added to the v2 curriculum&lt;br /&gt;

Common Cisco ASA adaptive security appliance VPN Configurations Components&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Identify ASA VPN licensing requirements&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Identify the components and features of AnyConnect 3.0 Mobility (VPN, NAM, Web Sec (ScanSafe), an Telemetry)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement ASA VPN connection profiles, group policies, and user policies&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol (SCEP) proxy operations using Cisco Adaptive Security Device Manager (ASDM)&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement local and external VPN authorization using ASDM/
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement VPN session accounting using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement Cisco Secure Desktop and Independent Host Scan operations using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement DAP operations using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement LOCAL CA operations for Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) VPNs using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement certificate maps using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Identify the ASA IPv6 VPN capabilities&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Monitor and verify the resulting CLI commands resulting from the various VPN configurations on the ASA&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;
ASA IP SEC S2S VPN&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement a security 
high-level design according to policy and environmental requirements by 
identifying Cisco ASA IPSec S2S VPN features and supporting technologies&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement basic IPSEC S2S VPN operations with PSK and digital certificates using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement basic IKEv2 based IPSEC S2S VPN operations using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Troubleshoot the initial provisioning IPSec S2S VPN applications due to misconfiguration&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA EZVPN&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement a security high 
level design according to policy and environmental requirements by 
identifying Cisco ASA VPN client features and supporting technologies&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement basic EZVPN server operations on the ASA using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Basic EZVPN remote operations on the ASA 5505 using ASDM&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement AnyConnect 3.0 IKEv2 RA VPN operations&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement Client Services Server (CSS) feature&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Troubleshoot the initial provisioning IPSec RA VPN applications due to misconfiguration&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA AnyConnect SSL VPNs&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement a security 
high-level design according to policy and environmental requirements by 
identifying Cisco ASA AnyConnect client features and supporting 
technologies&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement DTLS operations using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement basic AnyConnect 3.0 full tunnel SSL VPN operations&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Troubleshoot AnyConnect SSL VPN operations using DART&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement AnyConnect Profiles using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement advanced authentication in AnyConnect Full Tunnel SSL VPNs (certificate and multiauthentication) using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Troubleshoot the initial provisioning client-based SSL VPN applications due to misconfiguration&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
ASA Clientless SSL VPNs&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement a security high 
level design according to policy and environmental requirements by 
identifying Cisco ASA clientless SSL VPN features and supporting 
technologies&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement basic Clientless SSL VPN operations using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement advanced applications access using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement the SSO features on the ASA in a clientless SSL VPN environment&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement advanced authentication in clientless SSL VPNs (certificate and multi-authentication) using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Manage the clientless SSL VPN user interface and portal using ASDM&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Implement basic portal customization&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #66ccff;&quot;&gt;Troubleshoot the initial provisioning of Clientless SSL VPN applications due to misconfiguration&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
SSL VPN High Availability&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;&lt;span style=&quot;background-color: #ffff99;&quot;&gt;Implement SSL and IPSEC VPN high availability features&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6381406431084110327/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cisco-ccnp-security-curriculum-update.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6381406431084110327'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6381406431084110327'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cisco-ccnp-security-curriculum-update.html' title='Cisco CCNP Security Curriculum Update'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-6976863436100082537</id><published>2012-09-04T02:27:00.003-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:27:29.606-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Top 7 Programming Language Certifications for Web Developers</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
Times have changed and websites are now much more complicated than 
they were when the Internet was first used by the public. &amp;nbsp;Now, thanks 
to new technologies and programming languages, Web development has 
become more and more exciting and at the same time very challenging.&amp;nbsp; A 
Web developer can put up just about any service on the Web, and as such,
 needs to have different skills sets. &amp;nbsp;A Web developer would have to 
know more about client side programming, server side programming and 
would even need to be &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/career-advice-cloud-mobile-devops&quot; title=&quot;DevOps Career Advice&quot;&gt;proficient in databases&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

Technologies come and go, and in Web development, it is essential to 
know the hottest and most used programming languages and technologies.&amp;nbsp; 
Right now, the biggest development areas are in:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Ruby on Rails&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Javascript&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Python&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Java&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;ASP.Net MVC&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Node-js&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Objective-C&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
So, if you are looking for a way to break into Web development, or 
just looking to have a demonstrable skill set, you might want to learn 
and get certified in these seven hot Web development know-hows.&lt;br /&gt;

But just how do you get certified for these? Read on and find out!&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Ruby on Rails&lt;/h2&gt;
A good certification program on Ruby on Rails is the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.ruby-assn.org/certification/programmer/&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Ruby Association Certified Ruby Programmer&quot;&gt;Ruby Association Certified Ruby Programmer&lt;/a&gt;.
 &amp;nbsp;The certification helps verify the skills of IT professionals who work
 with Ruby on Rails and is managed by ITOCHU Techno-Solutions 
Corporation. This certification is sanctioned by the Ruby Association 
LLC.&lt;br /&gt;

Currently, there is only one skill level that is certified:&amp;nbsp;The Ruby 
Association Certified Ruby Programmer Silver.&amp;nbsp; It covers the basics of 
Ruby, including background, objects, standard libraries and classes of 
Ruby.&amp;nbsp; This 50 question multiple-choice test lasts for 1 hour and 30 
minutes and costs $150.&lt;br /&gt;

This exam includes questions on execution environment in Ruby, 
command line option, grammar, built-in classes, built-in functions, and 
object orientation.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
JavaScript&lt;/h2&gt;
The &lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/ciw-certification-guide&quot; title=&quot;CIW Certification&quot;&gt;CIW Web Development Series&lt;/a&gt;
 has three specialized exams that you would have to pass in order to get
 the Web Development Professional title: Perl, Database Design and 
Javascript.&amp;nbsp; The Javascript Specialist exam will verify your skills in 
using JavaScript for client side solutions that are platform 
independent.&amp;nbsp; Questions touch on form validation, frame targeting and 
image animation, among other advanced Javascript topics.&lt;br /&gt;

If that is too complicated for you, you can avail of the &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.w3schools.com/cert/cert_javascript.asp&quot; rel=&quot;nofollow&quot; title=&quot;External Link - JavaScript Developer Certificate&quot;&gt;JavaScript Developer Certificate&lt;/a&gt;
 that W3Schools is offering.&amp;nbsp; For this certification, you need to have 
knowledge in both JavaScript and HTML DOM.&amp;nbsp; The 70-question exam lasts 
for 70 minutes.&amp;nbsp; You would need to get 75% of the questions correct to 
get the certificate.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Python&lt;/h2&gt;
The O’Reilly School of Technology, which is working with the University of Illinois at Urbana-Champaign, has released a &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.oreillyschool.com/certificates/python-programming.php&quot; title=&quot;External Link - four-level Python programming certificate program&quot;&gt;four-level Python programming certificate program&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

These four levels are:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Beginning Python&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Getting More Out of Python&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;The Python Environment&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Advanced Python&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
This is perhaps the first Python certification exam available, with 
none other than Steve Holden creating it.&amp;nbsp; Holden is the chair of the 
Python Software Foundation.&lt;br /&gt;

However, If you do not want to invest that much time or money in a 
Python certification you might want to go by the Expert Rating route.&amp;nbsp; 
Expert Rating offers an online test that would quiz you on the basics of
 Python, common modules, programming concepts, Web programming, 
exception handling, object class, namespaces, bindings, printing, text 
processing and advanced concepts, among others.&lt;br /&gt;

The proctored test will last 40 minutes and will have 40 
multiple-choice items.&amp;nbsp; Each item will have two to eight options.&amp;nbsp; The 
test costs $10.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Java&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;div align=&quot;center&quot;&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/07/javase6programmer.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;Oracle Certified Professional Java SE Programmer&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-34141&quot; height=&quot;233&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2012/07/javase6programmer.jpg&quot; width=&quot;403&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;/div&gt;
The &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://java.sun.com/new2java/articles/certification.html&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Oracle Certified Professional Java SE Programmer&quot;&gt;Oracle Certified Professional Java SE Programmer&lt;/a&gt;
 is the most basic certification exam for those who work with Java.&amp;nbsp; 
Provided by Sun Microsystems, the exam seeks to certify your skills in 
Java.&amp;nbsp; This is a requirement for other Java certifications and costs 
$150.&amp;nbsp; Test takers will be given 150 minutes to answer 60 questions.&lt;br /&gt;

For those with advanced skills in Java, you might be interested in 
Oracle Certified Master Java SE Developer.&amp;nbsp; You would need to be a Sun 
Certified Programmer to take this test, but a Java Associate 
certification is not required.&amp;nbsp; The exam costs $575. &amp;nbsp;The Master Java 
certification combines a written certification exam and a practical 
programming task.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
ASP.Net MVC&lt;/h2&gt;
While there are a lot of ASP.NET certification exams available, only a
 handful actually certifies MVC skills.&amp;nbsp; And while you have ASP.NET, 
this does not necessarily mean that you know MVC.&amp;nbsp; A good certification 
program is &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.microsoft.com/learning/en/us/exam.aspx?id=70-515#tab2&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Microsoft’s MCTS: Web Applications Development with Microsoft .NET Framework 4&quot;&gt;Microsoft’s MCTS: Web Applications Development with Microsoft .NET Framework 4&lt;/a&gt;, which also measures your skills in setting up and deploying MVC applications.&lt;br /&gt;

Specifically, your skills in ASP.NET MVC will be tested in the 
configuring and extending a web application section, which is 15% of the
 exam.&amp;nbsp; As part of this section, you will be asked about deploying an 
MVC application.&amp;nbsp; Another part of the test that is relevant to ASP.NET 
MVC 2 accounts for 13% of the exam where you are asked about developing 
Web applications using MVC 2.&amp;nbsp; This section includes the following 
topics, among others:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ol&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating custom routes&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creating actions and controllers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Structuring an application based on ASP.NET MVC&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Customizing and creating views&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ol&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Node-js&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;https://atgcertified.org/atg-exam&amp;amp;exam=PRG-NJS-110&quot; title=&quot;ATG Certified&quot;&gt;ATG Certified&lt;/a&gt;
 provides a standalone Certified Node.js Developer Exam that costs $79.&amp;nbsp;
 The four-hour exam demonstrates one’s skills in node.js, TCP and HTTP 
servers.&amp;nbsp; The candidate will be tested on his or her skills in writing a
 Javascript server using node, as well as his or her understanding of 
TCP and ports.&amp;nbsp; It also covers data transmission from a client to a 
server and back.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Objective-C&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.brainmeasures.com/online/newtests/1103/objective-c-certification.aspx&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Brain Measures&quot;&gt;Brain Measures&lt;/a&gt;
 offers an Objective-C certification program that costs only $10.&amp;nbsp; The 
test covers 40 multiple-choice questions that each have two to five 
options.&amp;nbsp; &lt;br /&gt;

Topics covered include the following, among others: &lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Best practices&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Exceptions&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Categories&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Memory Management&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Protocols&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.expertrating.com/certifications/Objective-C-Test.asp&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Expert Rating&quot;&gt;Expert Rating&lt;/a&gt; also provides a similar examination.&lt;br /&gt;

Web development professionals would need to undergo these 
certifications to help them get hired.&amp;nbsp; Having the skills is simply not 
enough. You need to prove your ability so that a potential employer 
would be able to discern how talented you are even before you show them 
your portfolio.&amp;nbsp; Take note that because some of these technologies are 
rather new, there are no official providers.&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/6976863436100082537/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-7-programming-language.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6976863436100082537'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/6976863436100082537'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-7-programming-language.html' title='Top 7 Programming Language Certifications for Web Developers'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-3720593333677896477</id><published>2012-09-04T02:26:00.001-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-04T02:26:06.612-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Cisco CCNA Service Provider Certification Guide</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
With the expanding growth of public Internet and networking services 
it is very important that any new or existing networking engineer 
looking to work at a Service Provider (SP) be well trained on the 
technologies that will be deployed. While much of the SP environment 
overlaps in terms of skillset to that of an enterprise engineer, there 
are a number of different features and technologies that are simply not 
required for most enterprises. Cisco’s SP line of certifications allows a
 candidate to follow a clear path when the expected outcome is working 
for a service provider; this includes preparing the candidate with the 
knowledge necessary to succeed. &lt;br /&gt;

The CCNA Service Provider certification requires the candidate to 
pass two different exams, including the Building Cisco Service Provider 
Next-Generation Networks, Part 1 and Part 2; the CCNA SP certification 
has no prerequisites. The next two sections will show the current 
objectives for both of these exams, which are both 90 minutes and 
ranging  65-75 questions.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Building Cisco Service Provider Next-Generation Networks Part 1&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
640-875 SPNGN1&lt;/h3&gt;
IP Networks&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the purpose and functions of various network devices (at the core, distribution, and access layers)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Identify the functional components required to meet a given network specification&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the OSI and TCP/IP models and their associated protocols to explain how data flows in a network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe common network applications and their impact on the network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Interpret network diagrams&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Troubleshoot common network problems at layers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7 using a layered model approach&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe differences between LAN and WAN operation and features&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
IPv4 and IPv6 Addressing&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the structure of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe VLSM, CIDR and route summarization concepts&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the different types of IPv4 and IPv6 addresses&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Design an IP subnetting plan based on given requirements&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Switched Network Technologies I&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe bridging concepts and Layer 2 Ethernet frames&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic Spanning Tree operations on Cisco IOS Switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Interpret the output of various basic show and debug commands to verify the operational status of a Cisco switched network&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic switch security (i.e, port security, securing unused ports)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Ethernet link bundling, LACP, and PAgP and Flex Links&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Routed Network Technologies I&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe classful versus classless routing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe routing protocols basics (metrics, IGP versus EGP)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe RIPv1, RIPv2, RIPNG&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement EIGRPv4 and EIGRPv6 on Cisco IOS, IOS-XE and IOS-XR routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe route redistribution&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe VRF&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe GRE&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
IP Services&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure NAT (IPv4) on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure DHCP (IPv4 and IPv6) operations on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe ICMPv4 and ICMPv6&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe DNS&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Cisco Operating Systems and Platforms I&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement basic Cisco IOS, IOS-XE and IOS-XR CLI operations&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement basic Cisco IOS, IOS-XE and IOS-XR routers configurations&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Transport Technologies&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe SONET and SDH&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe DWDM, IPoDWDM, and ROADM&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure 10 Gigabit Ethernet, 40 Gigabit Ethernet, and 100 Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Frame Relay&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe ATM&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Metro Ethernet&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe DSL&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe T1, T3, E1, E3, and ISDN&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement PPP encapsulation on Cisco routers serial and POS interfaces&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe cable (DOCSIS)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the main BRAS and BNG routers functions in IP NGN&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe various Passive Optical Network (PON) access technologies and FTTx&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Security in the Network&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Layer 2 security features on Cisco IOS switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure management plane security on Cisco routers and IOS switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe IPsec&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe control plane security&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic AAA (TACACS+ and RADIUS) services on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure routing protocols authentication between Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the relationships between users, user groups, tasks groups and task IDs in IOS-XR&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe common types of network attacks&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Network Management&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure NTP server or client on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure IP SLA on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure CDP on Cisco routers and IOS switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure SNMP on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure NetFlow on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure logging to Syslog server on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the Cisco IOS Call-Home feature&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Cisco TAC procedure and navigate Cisco support tools (CCO)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement management access (SSH, telnet, and out-of-band management design)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement SPAN, RSPAN, and ERSPAN&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement file transfers to manage network devices configurations and images using FTP, SCP, TFTP, SFTP, and RCP&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
Building Cisco Service Provider Next-Generation Networks Part 2&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h3&gt;
640-878 SPNGN2&lt;/h3&gt;
IP NGN Architecture&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Identify the functional components that are required to meet a given network specification&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Troubleshoot common network problems at Layers 1, 2, 3, 4, and 7 using a layered-model approach&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the different types of service providers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe service provider principal and reference next-generation network (NGN) architecture&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the IP address and autonomous system (AS) number allocation
 process via the Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) and Regional
 Internet Registries (RIRs)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Switched Network Technologies II&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure enhanced switching technologies (including Rapid Spanning 
Tree Protocol [RSTP], Multiple Spanning Tree [MST], and Per VLAN 
Spanning Tree [PVST]) on Cisco IOS Software switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe how VLANs create logically separate networks and the need for routing between them&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure VLANs on Cisco IOS Software switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure trunking on Cisco IOS Software switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure inter-VLAN routing&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) on Cisco IOS Software switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure queue-in-queue (QinQ) on Cisco IOS Software switches&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Routed Network Technologies II&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic single-area Open Shortest Path First version 2 (OSPFv2) and OSPF version 3 (OSPFv3) routing on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic single-area Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the differences between static versus dynamic routing as 
well as distance vector versus link-state routing protocol operations&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure basic Border Gateway Protocol (BGP) routing on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe the address family concept on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe IPv6 transitioning technologies&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure First Hop Redundancy Protocol (FHRP) (including Hot 
Standby Router Protocol [HSRP], Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol 
[VRRP], and Gateway Load Balancing Protocol [GLBP]) on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Implement access control list (ACL) on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe carrier-grade NAT (CGN) and Network Address Translation 64 (NAT64)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Multiprotocol Label Switching (MPLS) functions in the service provider IP NGN&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Configure Label Distribution Protocol (LDP) on Cisco routers&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
Cisco Operating Systems and Platforms II&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Manage the Cisco IOS XR configurations and software packages&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Cisco IOS XE software packages&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Describe Cisco service provider router platforms, their operating system, and their placement in the service provider IP NGN&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/3720593333677896477/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cisco-ccna-service-provider.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/3720593333677896477'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/3720593333677896477'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/cisco-ccna-service-provider.html' title='Cisco CCNA Service Provider Certification Guide'/><author><name>Anonymous</name><uri>http://www.blogger.com/profile/02200784445166968608</uri><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry><entry><id>tag:blogger.com,1999:blog-935931406120078290.post-7472637319803341274</id><published>2012-09-03T11:31:00.002-07:00</published><updated>2012-09-03T11:31:51.392-07:00</updated><title type='text'>Top 9 Linux Productivity Tips and Tools</title><content type='html'>&lt;div dir=&quot;ltr&quot; style=&quot;text-align: left;&quot; trbidi=&quot;on&quot;&gt;
One of the benefits of Linux is its flexibility. You can customize 
virtually every aspect of the operating system to suit your needs.&lt;br /&gt;

In order to assist those new to Ubuntu I’ve compiled a list of tools that will enhance your productivity:&lt;br /&gt;

&amp;nbsp; • &amp;nbsp; Application/Task Launchers&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; • &amp;nbsp; Keyboard Shortcuts&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; • &amp;nbsp; Clipboard Management&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;nbsp; • &amp;nbsp; and much more!&lt;br /&gt;

Check them out and let me know what your best tip for Linux productivity is.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
1. Save Time With Aliases&lt;/h2&gt;
One of the most powerful features of &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.gnu.org/software/bash/bash.html&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Bash&quot;&gt;Bash&lt;/a&gt;
 (the free shell written for the GNU Project) is the use of aliases. 
Think of aliases as shortcuts — they use shorter commands to execute a 
longer or series of longer commands. And anything that saves typing 
time, is always welcome.&lt;br /&gt;

For example, if you prefer to use the command line to update and 
upgrade Ubuntu versus synaptic, you would open a terminal window and 
type: &lt;strong&gt;sudo apt-get update &amp;amp;&amp;amp; sudo apt-get upgrade&lt;/strong&gt;. That’s quite a bit of typing. Say you only wanted to type the word &lt;strong&gt;update&lt;/strong&gt; to perform the same function. You would edit your &lt;strong&gt;~/.bashrc&lt;/strong&gt; file and add this line:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
alias update=’sudo apt-get update &amp;amp;&amp;amp; sudo apt-get upgrade’&lt;/blockquote&gt;
Are there other repetitive tasks that your perform daily, weekly? 
Give aliases a try. As always, I recommend you make a backup of your 
.bashrc file before editing.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;span id=&quot;more-10337&quot;&gt;&lt;/span&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
2. Use Application/Task Launchers&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
 • GNOME Do&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;image courtesy of GNOME Do&quot; class=&quot;size-full wp-image-10340&quot; height=&quot;175&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/do1.png&quot; title=&quot;image courtesy of GNOME Do&quot; width=&quot;175&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

To call &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://do.davebsd.com/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - GNOME Do&quot;&gt;GNOME Do&lt;/a&gt;
 (also known as Do) a launcher does not fully explain the capabilities 
of this tool. Through the use of keyboard shortcuts, it can help you 
perform many common tasks. Do can help you launch an application, search
 for a file, manage your music player and a host of other things.&lt;br /&gt;

Want to open firefox? Simply type “f”. Want to send an email to your favorite editor? Type editor, hit tab, then type email.&lt;br /&gt;

Install via synaptic package manager or from the command line:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;sudo apt-get install gnome-do&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Launchy&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;img align=&quot;right&quot; alt=&quot;image courtesy of Launchy&quot; class=&quot;size-full wp-image-10342&quot; height=&quot;100&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/launchy.png&quot; title=&quot;image courtesy of Launchy&quot; width=&quot;500&quot; /&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Do isn’t the only tool in the launcher space. &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.launchy.net/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Launchy&quot;&gt;Launchy&lt;/a&gt; is another option, initially a Windows product, it now has a Linux version.&lt;br /&gt;

Launchy, like Do, wants to make your application menu obsolete. It 
launches apps, documents and bookmarks using keyboard combinations. 
Start Launchy by holding the alt key and hitting the space bar, then 
typing a few keystrokes.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
3. Take Advantage of Docking Systems&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
 • Cairo-Dock&lt;/h5&gt;
Are you a fan of the Mac Operating system dock? Then you’ll be happy 
to know that Linux has their own versions. Cairo-Dock is a Mac-like 
application launcher for the Linux desktop. Populate the launch bar with
 your favorite apps and applets, then launch them with one mouse-click.&lt;br /&gt;

Cairo-dock is available in the Ubuntu repositories.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/cairo.jpg&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;cairo&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10338&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/cairo.jpg&quot; title=&quot;cairo&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Awn&lt;/h5&gt;
Avant Window Navigator (AWN) is another option, and the one that I 
use. Like Cairo, it sits at the bottom of your screen and can be used to
 lauch applications and applets and has extensive plugins to enhance 
functionality.&lt;br /&gt;

Awn is also available in the repositories, just be sure to install all three of these packages:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;avant-window-navigator-trunk&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;awn-manager-trunk&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;awn-extras-applets-trunk&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/awn.png&quot;&gt;&lt;img alt=&quot;awn&quot; class=&quot;aligncenter size-full wp-image-10339&quot; src=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/wp-content/uploads/2010/03/awn.png&quot; title=&quot;awn&quot; /&gt;&lt;/a&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
4. Do More with Clipboard Management&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
 • Klipper&lt;/h5&gt;
GNOME is the default graphical environment for Ubuntu Linux, but there are other options like KDE. &lt;a href=&quot;https://help.ubuntu.com/community/Klipper&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot;&gt;Klipper&lt;/a&gt; (hence the &lt;em&gt;K&lt;/em&gt;)
 is an advanced clipboard utility that runs under KDE. It turns basic 
clipboard functionality on its ear, storing clipboard history, and 
allowing you to link clipboard contents to application actions.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
5. Save Time with On-The-Fly Encryption&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;a href=&quot;http://www.trainsignal.com/blog/improve-windows-privacy-with-truecrypt/2009-07-13/&quot;&gt;TrueCrypt&lt;/a&gt; is an open source disk encryption software. Here’s a feature snapshot:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;ul&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Creates a virtual encrypted disk within a file and mounts it as a real disk.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;Real-time Encryption of entire hard disk partition or storage device like USB flash drive.&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;li&gt;SHA-512 hash algorithm (replacing SHA-1, which is no longer available when creating new volumes)&lt;/li&gt;
&lt;/ul&gt;
TrueCrypt is not available in the repositories. You can download it &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://www.truecrypt.org/downloads&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - here&quot;&gt;here&lt;/a&gt;.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
6. Top Linux Keyboad Shortcuts&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
 • Switch to the Next/Previous Workspace&lt;/h5&gt;
If you’re like me and use workspaces to segment your wok — 1 for 
writing, 1 for web work, yet another for email and social networking — 
listen up. You can easily switch between workspaces by pressing the &lt;strong&gt;Ctrl + Alt + Left/Right Arrow&lt;/strong&gt;
 keys. As you may have guessed, the Left key takes you to the previous 
workspace while the Right key brings you to the next adjacent.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Show the Desktop&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Ctrl + Alt + D&lt;/strong&gt; allows you to quickly minimize all 
windows and bring focus back to your desktop. When all windows are 
minimized, it works in the reverse, maximizing all windows to their 
previous state.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Show Hidden Files&lt;/h5&gt;
By default, system or hidden files in your home folder aren’t 
visible, probably to protect us from accidentally deleting them. But 
occasionally we need to access these files and you can do so by pressing
 &lt;strong&gt;Ctrl + H&lt;/strong&gt; in the Nautilus file manager.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Application Specific Shortcuts&lt;/h5&gt;
A real time saver for me, application shortcuts are plainly visible 
in the pull-down menus at the top of the application’s screen. For 
example in Open Office Writer, click on File, and you’ll see that next 
to Open, the shortcut combination, &lt;strong&gt;Ctrl + O&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Launch an Application&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Alt + F2&lt;/strong&gt; will launch a box where you can type in an application name to launch it.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Access the Applications Menu&lt;/h5&gt;
&lt;strong&gt;Alt + F1&lt;/strong&gt;&lt;br /&gt;

Check out &lt;a href=&quot;https://help.ubuntu.com/community/KeyboardShortcuts&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot;&gt;this page&lt;/a&gt; for additional keyboard shortcuts.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
7. Switch to the Desktop Post-it Note&lt;/h2&gt;
&lt;h5&gt;
 • Tomboy Notes&lt;/h5&gt;
I’m trying to shed the habit of having physical sticky notes 
plastered on my desk. To help wean me off those addictive yellow pads, 
I’ve adopted Tomboy. This is a desktop version of the Post-it Note, 
albeit on steroids. Tomboy allows for highlighting, spell checking, 
linking, font styles and lists. It comes as a part of the default Ubuntu
 install.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h5&gt;
 • Scribes&lt;/h5&gt;
I have yet to try &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://scribes.sourceforge.net/&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Scribes&quot;&gt;Scribes&lt;/a&gt;,
 but have read many reviews touting its benefits over Tomboy. Its 
actually a full text editor, that works with Gnome and offers templates,
 tabbed input and numbered lines.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
8. Resize and Rotate Images in Nautilus&lt;/h2&gt;
For those that spend quite a bit of time working with images and 
needing to make quick edits without firing up Gimp or Photoshop, this 
tool is a must-have. After installation, and rebooting, you will be able
 to right-click on an image and you’ll see two new image items: resize 
and rotate.&lt;br /&gt;

Install from the command line:&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;blockquote&gt;
sudo aptitude install nautilus-image-converter&lt;/blockquote&gt;
&lt;h2&gt;
9. Increase Productivity with Project Tracking&lt;/h2&gt;
Not your typical project management application, &lt;a class=&quot;outboundlink&quot; href=&quot;http://freemind.sourceforge.net/wiki/index.php/Main_Page&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot; title=&quot;External Link - Freemind&quot;&gt;Freemind&lt;/a&gt;
 is more of a productivity tool that can help you track projects. Where 
this tool shines is in its ability to map Internet search links for easy
 reference. Its also an excellent brainstorming tool.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
Other Tips and Tricks&lt;/h2&gt;
This is just a snapshot of the available tips and tricks. A quick 
Google search will probably yield even more information. The Ubuntu  &lt;a href=&quot;https://wiki.ubuntu.com/DocumentationTeam&quot; target=&quot;_blank&quot;&gt;support website&lt;/a&gt; is an excellent resource.&lt;br /&gt;

If you are a fan of any of these tools or tricks, chime in. If there 
are others you’d like to share with the community, I invite you to do so
 in the comments.&lt;br /&gt;

&lt;h2&gt;
What’s Your Linux Productivity Tip?&lt;/h2&gt;
Leave a comment with your favorite tip for Linux productivity. What 
helps you get more done? What’s a great tool that you wouldn’t want to 
be without?&lt;/div&gt;
</content><link rel='replies' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/feeds/7472637319803341274/comments/default' title='Post Comments'/><link rel='replies' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-9-linux-productivity-tips-and-tools.html#comment-form' title='0 Comments'/><link rel='edit' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7472637319803341274'/><link rel='self' type='application/atom+xml' href='http://www.blogger.com/feeds/935931406120078290/posts/default/7472637319803341274'/><link rel='alternate' type='text/html' href='http://mstraining.blogspot.com/2012/09/top-9-linux-productivity-tips-and-tools.html' title='Top 9 Linux Productivity Tips and Tools'/><author><name>Unknown</name><email>noreply@blogger.com</email><gd:image rel='http://schemas.google.com/g/2005#thumbnail' width='16' height='16' src='https://img1.blogblog.com/img/b16-rounded.gif'/></author><thr:total>0</thr:total></entry></feed>